Benutzeranleitung / Produktwartung Aficio 1515 des Produzenten Dixon
Zur Seite of 1171
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book= 108 // P rint scal e=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thick ness / 2 = 4.320000 mm Operat ing Instr uctions General Settings Guide Read th is manual caref ully bef ore you use th is prod uct and keep i t handy for fut ure refe rence.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book= 108 // P rint scal e=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thick ness / 2 = 4.320000 mm In accor dance wi th IEC 6 0417, thi s machine u ses the f ollowi ng symbols for th e main pow er switc h: a a a a means POWER O N.
i Manuals f or This M achine The following manuals describe the oper ational procedures of this ma chine. For particular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual. Note ❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine ty pe. ❒ Adobe Acr obat Reader is nec essary to view t he manuals as a PDF file.
ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBind er V2 Lite Desk Top Binde r V2 L ite is a ut ilit y incl uded on th e CD- ROM l abe led “ Scanner Driv er & Docu men t Mana geme nt Ut ilit ies ” .
iii What You Can Do with This Machine The follow ing introduces the func tions of this machi ne, and the releva nt manu- als containing detailed information about them.
iv Fax Transmissi on and Reception through the Internet • You can send fax document s through e-m ail by specifying the recipient's e-mail address (Trans- mittin g Int ernet Fa x). You can re ceive se nt docu ments via Internet Fax, or f rom comput- ers (Receiving In ternet Fax ).
v Administrati ng the Machine (Security Funct ions) The security functions protect docu - ments from being cop ied without per miss ion o r unau thor ized acces s via the netwo rk. See p.85 “ Securit y ” . Note ❒ This functi on is only availa ble when the printer/s canner and fax units are inst alled.
vi TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machin e ...... ..... ........ ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ . i What You Can Do with This Ma chine ......... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ...
vii User Cod e (MFP ) ............. ...... ....... ...... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... . 45 Registering a New User Code........... .......... ....... .......... .......... ...... .......... ....... .......
viii 7. Security Security ..... ........ ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... . 85 Primary Securit y Functions ........ ....... .......... ....... .......... .......... .....
1 Copyrights and Trademarks Trademar ks Micr osof t ® , Window s ® and Windows NT ® are registered trademarks of Micro- soft Corpor ation in the U nited States and /or other co untries. PostScript ® and A cro bat ® are a r egistered trademark of Ado be Systems Incorp o- rated.
2 Information about Inst alled Software expat • The softwar e including con troller, etc. (hereinafter “ software ” ) inst alle d on this product us es the expat Version 1.95.2 (hereinafter “ expat ” ) under the con- dition s mentio ned belo w.
3 NetBSD 1. Cop yright N otice of NetB SD For all users to use thi s product: This product contains NetBS D operating system: For th e mos t part , th e sof tware const itut ing the N etBSD o per ating syst em is n ot in the p ublic domain; its aut hors r etain t heir c opyright .
4 2. Authors Name List All product nam es mentioned herein are tradem arks of their respective owners. The followin g notices are requ ired to satisfy the licen se terms of the software that we have mentioned in this doc ument: • This prod uct includes software d eveloped by the Uni versity of California, Berkel ey and i ts co ntributors.
5 Sabl otro n Sablotron ( Version 0.82) Co pyright (c) 2000 Ginger Alli ance Ltd. A ll Rights Re- serve a) The applic ation sof tware inst alled on this product includes the Sablotro n soft- ware Version 0 .82 (hereinafter, “ Sablotron 0.82 ” ), with modifications m ade by the product manu facturer.
6 SASL CMU libsasl Tim Marti n Rob Earhart Rob Siemborski Copyright (c) 2001 Carnegie Mell on University. Al l rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modif.
7 MD4 Co pyrig ht (C) 1 990- 2, RSA Data S ecurity , Inc. Al l righ ts rese rved . Lice nse to copy and use t his softw are is g ranted pr ovided that it is id entifie d as the “ RSA Data Security, Inc. MD4 Message-Digest Alg orithm ” in all material mention ing or referencing this software or this function.
8 How to Read This Manual Symb ols The f ollowing se t of sy mbols is u sed in thi s manual . R WARNING: This symbol ind icates a potentially hazardous situation that migh t result in death or serious i njury when you misuse the mac hine without following t he in- struc tions under thi s symb ol.
9 ENER GY ST AR Pr ogra m • Low Powe r mode This produ ct autom atical ly low ers its po wer con sumpt ion 1 min ute af ter fin- ishing th e last co py or pr int job. Fax recept ion and p rinting i s still po ssible in Low Power mode, but to make copies, you have to p ress the operation swi tch first.
10 •D u p l e x P r i o r i t y To conserve paper, the Duplex function (1-Sided → 2-Si ded) can b e selected pref erential ly wh en you turn on th e ope ratio n swit ch or the m ain p ower switch, press the { { { { Clear Mod es } } } } key, or the mach ine resets itsel f automati cally.
11 1. Getting Started Guide to Comp onents 1. Exposur e glass cover Lower this over originals. 2. Auto Document Feeder See p.13 “ Oth er Item s ” . 3. Exposur e glass Place originals fa ce down here. 4. Internal tray Cop ied, printe d paper, or fa x messa ges are delivered here.
Getting Sta rted 12 1 8. On indicator Lights when the operation switch is turned on, and goes off when the switc h is turned off. 9. Operation switch Press to tu rn the pow er on (the On indi- cator lights). To turn the pow er off, press again (the On i ndicat or goes off) .
Other It ems 13 1 Other Items • Extern al 1. Auto Document Feeder Fee ds in orig ina ls au toma tic ally . 2. Paper tray unit (Tray 2) Holds 500 sheets. • Internal A Fax unit Allow s you to use the facsimile functi on. B Printe r/Scanner u nit Allows you to use the printer and scanner functions.
Getting Sta rted 14 1 Note ❒ You canno t install two or mor e of the op tions below : Para llel port I EEE 1284 interface board, IEEE 1394 i nterface board, IEEE 802.
Control Panel 15 1 Control Panel This illust ration shows the co ntrol panel of the mach ine with fa x, printer , and scanner installed. 1. Fax funct ion keys Referenc e Facsim ile Refere nce <Basic Featur es> and Facsi mile Reference <Advanc ed Features> 2.
Getting Sta rted 16 1 14. Main power ind icator and On indicator The m ain power ind icator lights when the main powe r swit ch is t urn ed on . The On indi cator lights w hen the o peration sw itch is on . Important ❒ Do not tur n off the main powe r switch while th e On indi cator i s lit or blinking.
Control Panel 17 1 Display The display pa nel shows machine stat us, error messages, and function menus. Important ❒ A for ce or i mpact of more than 30 N ( about 3 kgf) will d amage t he disp lay. The copy di splay is set as the default screen when the machin e is turned on.
Getting Sta rted 18 1 Common key o perations The follow ing keys are co mmon to all screens: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Key list [ Cancel ] Deletes a selected function or e ntered values, and then the pr evious di spla y re tur ns. [ Exit ] The previous di splay returns.
19 2. Combined Function Operations Changing Modes Note ❒ You cannot sw itch modes in any of th e following situations: • When scanning a fax m essage for transmissi on • During immediate transmi.
Combined Funct ion Operations 20 2 - - - - System Re set The machine returns automatically to its initial condition when the j ob is fin- ished, after a certain period of time has elapsed. This functi on is called “ System Reset ” . Note ❒ You can c hange the System Reset time .
Multi-Acce ss 21 2 Multi- Access You can carry out another job using a different function while the current job is being p erformed. Performing multiple functions simultaneously like this is called “ Mult i-ac cess ing ” . This allows you to handle jobs efficiently, reg ardless of how the machine is being used.
Combined Funct ion Operations 22 2 b … means that th ese function s can be u sed toge ther. $ … means that you can interr upt the current job with Function keys to p roceed to a subsequent job. 1 … means th at another job w ill automatic ally start after the current job is fin- ished.
23 3. User Tools (System Settings) User T ools Me nu (Sys tem Sett ings) Referenc e For detail s about Interface S ettings and File Trans fer, see “ User T ools Menu (System S ettings) ” , Net work Gu ide . For details about para llel interfac e, see “ System Settings (Paralle l Connec- tion) ” , Pri nte r R efe renc e 2 .
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 24 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Timer Settings (See p.31 “ Tim er Setti ngs ” .) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Interface Settings • For details abou t network settings , see Net wor k Guid e . • For details about parallel inter face, see P rinter Referenc e 2 .
User Tool s Menu (System Set tings) 25 3 Progra m/Chan ge User Code Pr ogram — Chang e — Dele te — Address Book:Print List Destination List — Group Destination List — Quick Dial Label — AOF (Always On ) On Default (MFP) Default (Copier onl y) StellaC2_AEzen_F_FM.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 26 3 Accessi ng User T ools ( System Setti ngs) This sectio n is for key operator s in charge of this m achi ne. User Tools allow you to change or set defau lt s. Note ❒ Operations for system settings dif- fer from normal operations.
Accessi ng User Tools ( System Set tings) 27 3 Quitting User Tools A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. ABU205S StellaC2_AEzen_F_FM.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 28 3 Settings You Can C hange with User Tools Referenc e To access User Tools, see p.26 “ Accessing User Tools (System Settings) ” . General Feat ures ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Panel To ne The beeper (key tone) sound s when a key i s pressed.
Settings Yo u Can Change w ith User Tools 29 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Measurement Unit You can switch the measurement betw een “ mm ” and “ inch ” . Note ❒ Defaul t: Metri c ver sion: mm ❒ Inch ver sion: inch Tray Paper Sett ings ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Tray Paper Size:T ray 1 – 2 Select the size of the p aper loa ded in the pape r tray .
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 30 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Paper Type:Tray 1 – 2 Set the display so you can see what typ e of paper is loaded in each paper tray.
Settings Yo u Can Change w ith User Tools 31 3 Timer Settings ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Auto Off Timer After a spec ified period has passed, fo llowing job comp letion, the machine automat ical ly turns off, in or der to con serve ene rgy. This functi on is called “ Auto Off ” .
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 32 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Copier Auto Reset Timer Speci fy the ti me to elap se befo re copi er mode resets . Note ❒ If [ Of f ] is selected , the machine does not aut omatically switch t o the user code entry scree n. ❒ Default: On , 60 sec.
Settings Yo u Can Change w ith User Tools 33 3 Key Operator Tools The key o perator must set the following items (for settings or m ore information, contact the key operator): We recommen d that the key operator program a key operat or code when mak- ing settings.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 34 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Extende d Security Specify whether or not to us e the security function. Note ❒ Default : Off ❒ You have to set a 6-digit key operator code to enable Extended Security. See p.33 “ Key O per ator Code ” .
Settings Yo u Can Change w ith User Tools 35 3 D Sele ct [ Dis play/Print Count er ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. E Press [ Prin t ] . F Press the { { { { Start } } } } key. G Press the { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 36 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Address Book Management You can a dd, cha nge, or delete u ser inform ation in the Addres s Book, and fac- simile/scanner function s destinations. For de tails abou t these oper ations, se e p.45 “ User Code (MFP) ” , p.
Settings Yo u Can Change w ith User Tools 37 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Program/Change/D elete Group You can regist er multip le users in a grou p. This a llows y ou to e asily cont rol reg istered users in ea ch grou p. For details about operations, see p.62 “ Registeri ng Destinations to a Group ” .
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 38 3 User C ode (F or mac hines with co pier function only) Registe r user codes to re strict copier functions to certain users, an d check on thei r use of copier fu nctions. Register ing a New User Code A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key.
User Code (For mac hines with c opier func tion only) 39 3 Changing a User Cod e Note ❒ Even if you change a user code, the counter value will not be clear ed.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 40 3 F F F F Sele ct [ Per User Code ] or [ All User Codes ] us ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and th en pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. Whe n select ing [ All User Code s ] , a confirmation message appears.
User Code (For mac hines with c opier func tion only) 41 3 Printing the Counter for Each User Code You can print out the count er for each user code. A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sele ct [ Syst em Set ting s ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key .
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 42 3 Address Boo k Registering user inform ation, su ch as fax numbers and e-mail addresses, in the Ad dress Book a llows yo u to ma n- age t hem to geth er. Important ❒ Address Book d ata is stored in memory. It can be lost if there is s om e k in d of m e mo r y fa i lu r e.
Address Bo ok 43 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Items to register • User Name Refe rence p.43 “ Registe ring the desti- nation name ” p.44 “ Registeri ng Sender In- form atio n ” • Fax Settings Refe rence p.43 “ When using the fax func ti on ” • E-mail Setti ngs Refe rence p.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 44 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When usi ng the scan ner function • E-mail Register e-mail addresses i n the Address Book. To send sca n files by e -mail, select the desti- nation from the D estination List, so you can specify the e- mail address.
User Code (MFP) 45 3 User C ode (MFP ) Register user co des to restric t the fol- lowing functions to c ertain users, and check th eir use of each function : • Copier • Facsim ile • Scanner • Printer Note ❒ The number of copies scanned in using the scanner functi on is count ed for ea ch use r code .
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 46 3 E E E E Sele ct [ Program/Change ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key . F F F F Enter the registration number you want to program using the number keys or the Qu ick Dial key s, an d then pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
User Code (MFP) 47 3 E E E E Sele ct [ Program/Change ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key . F F F F Pre ss [ Search ] . Note ❒ You can a lso enter the reg istra- tion number of the user (desti- nation) using the number keys or the Quick Dial keys.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 48 3 Deleting a User Code A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sele ct [ Syst em Set ting s ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then p ress the { { { { OK } } } } key.
User Code (MFP) 49 3 M M M M Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. Displaying the Counter for Each User Code You can check the counter made un- der each function' s user co de. A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 50 3 Note ❒ Repea t this ste p when you want to print more tha n one counte r. C Press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. D Press th e { { { { Sta rt } } } } key.
User Code (MFP) 51 3 Note ❒ Repea t this ste p when you want to clear more than on e counte r. C Press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. A confirmat ion message ap- pear s. D Press [ Yes ] . The “ Cou nter has been cleare d. ” message appears, and then the Codes: Cou nters display ret urns.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 52 3 Fax De stinatio n Register fax destinations, so you do not need to enter them each time, and can send d ocuments scanned in using the fax function. • It is easy to select the fax destina- tion if you regist er a “ User (Destina- tion ) Name ” for the fax destination.
Fax Destinati on 53 3 E E E E Sele ct [ Program/Change ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key . F F F F Enter the registration number you want to program using the number keys or the Qu ick Dial key s, an d then pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 54 3 C Select [ On ] or [ Off ] usin g { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Fax Destinati on 55 3 G G G G Sele ct [ Display De stination List ] us- ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. H H H H Select the f ax destination use r you wa nt to c hange usi ng { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 56 3 F F F F Pre ss [ Search ] . Note ❒ You can a lso enter the reg istra- tion number of the user (desti- nation) using the number keys or the Quick Dial keys. After en- tering the number, press the { { { { OK } } } } key, and then proceed to step I .
E-mail Dest ination 57 3 E-mail Dest inatio n Register e-mail d estinations, so you do not need to enter e-mail ad dresses ever y ti me, and c an s end s can fil es b y e-ma il, or s end fa x do cume nts by In- ternet Fa x.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 58 3 F F F F Enter the registration number you want to program using the number keys or the Qu ick Dial key s, an d then pre ss t he { { { { OK } } } } key. G G G G Enter the user (destinati on) name using the number keys and the Quick Dial k eys, and then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key.
E-mail Dest ination 59 3 M M M M Enter t he sender 's passwor d us- ing the numb er keys, and then pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ You can enter up to eight d igits. N N N N Pre ss th e { { { { Cancel } } } } key. O O O O Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 60 3 J J J J Pre ss [ Dest. ] . K K K K Sele ct [ E- mail Settings ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. L L L L Enter the new e-ma il address u s- ing the number keys and the Quick Dial k eys, and then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key.
E-mail Dest ination 61 3 Note ❒ Sele ct [ Program/Cha nge ] if you want to delete only the e-mail address. ❒ Sele ct [ Delete ] if you want to de- lete al l use r inform atio n. F F F F Pre ss [ Search ] . Note ❒ You can a lso enter the reg istra- tion number of the user (desti- nation) using the number keys or the Quick Dial keys.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 62 3 Registe ring Destinations to a Group Register destinations to a group to easil y contr ol reg ister ed fax and e- mail addr ess for e ach gr oup . To group d estinations, the groups must be registered beforehand. Note ❒ You can register up to 10 groups.
Register ing Dest inations to a Group 63 3 H H H H Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Programmed ” m essage ap- pears, and then the “ Group ” dis- play r eturns. I I I I Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. Register ing a Destination to a Group A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 64 3 K K K K Sele ct [ Program G roup ] usi ng { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key . L L L L Select the group name to which you want to register using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then check it using { { { {V V V V} } } } .
Register ing Dest inations to a Group 65 3 J J J J Pre ss [ Dest. ] . K K K K Sele ct [ Program G roup ] usi ng { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key .
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 66 3 Refe rence For details about entering text, see p.83 “ Entering Text ” . C Press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. D Select th e group you want to display using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Register ing Dest inations to a Group 67 3 Changing a Group Name A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sele ct [ Syst em Set ting s ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key .
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 68 3 Searching to select a registered group by registration number A Select [ S earch by Regi stration No. ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Register ing Dest inations to a Group 69 3 B Enter th e characters of the des- tination you want to delete us- ing the num ber keys and the Quick Dia l keys, and then press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. Refe rence For details about entering text, see p.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 70 3 Using the Se arch Function to Sele ct a Dest inat ion You ca n use the search functi on to se- lect a registered destination by name, registered number, user code, fax number or e-mail add ress. A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key.
Using t he Searc h Functi on to Se lect a Destinat ion 71 3 D Select the us er (destination) you want to change or delete using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. Searching to select a registered destination by registration number A Select [ S earch by Regi stration No.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 72 3 Searching to select a registered destination by fax number A Select [ Search by Fax No. ] us ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
73 4. Troubleshooting If Your Mac hine Does Not Operate As You Want The following chart gives explanations of common pr oblems and messages. If other messages appear, follow the instruc tions displayed. Note ❒ For further “ Troub leshootin g ” , refer to the oth er manuals for this machin e.
Troublesh ooting 74 4 Cannot print in d uplex mode. You cannot u se paper in the bypass tray for du plex prin ting. For duplex pr inting, select Tray 1-2 in copier mode or with the printer driver. [ Off ] is selected for [ Duplex ] in Paper Type: Tr ay 1-2.
x Clearing Mis feeds 75 4 x x x x Clearing Misfee ds R CAUTIO N: Important ❒ When cl earing misfeeds, do not turn off th e power sw itch. If you do, your copy settings are cleared. ❒ To prevent misfeeds, do not leave any torn scraps of paper inside the ma- chi ne.
Troublesh ooting 76 4 displa yed displa yed displa yed ABU040S StellaC2_AEzen_F_FM.boo k Page 76 Monda y, December 22, 2003 2:1 5 PM.
Changing the Paper Size 77 4 Changing the Pape r Size Prep arat ion Be sure to sel ect the pape r size w it h U s e r T o o l s . I f y o u d o n o t , m i s - feeds mi ght occur. Se e p.29 “ Tray Pape r Siz e:Tray 1 – 2 ” . Referenc e For detail s about pap er sizes and types , see p.
Troublesh ooting 78 4 F F F F Square t he paper and l oad it in the tray . Importa nt ❒ Be sure to l oa d th e p ap er u nd er the roller. ❒ Do not stack paper over the lim- it m ark. G G G G While pressing the relea se lever, adjust the side fences to the new pape r si ze.
Changing the Paper Size 79 4 When loading 8 1 / 4 " × 14" L or 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L size paper A Pull the back fence off from the tray. B Place i t in the corne r pocket on the left. D D D D While pressing the relea se lever, adjust the side fences .
Troublesh ooting 80 4 Sele cting the Paper Size with User Tools A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sele ct [ Syst em Set ting s ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key .
81 5. Other Function Other Function Displaying the Tot al Counter You can d isplay th e total c ounte r val- ue used for all function s. A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sele ct [ Counter ] usi ng { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Other Func tion 82 5 StellaC2_AEzen_F_FM.boo k Page 82 Monda y, December 22, 2003 2:1 5 PM.
83 6. Entering Text Ente rin g Tex t This sect ion de scribes how to ente r characters. When you enter a charac- ter, it appears at the cursor p osition. If there is a character already at the cur- sor position, the newly en tered char- acter appears befo re it.
Entering Te xt 84 6 Entering letters A A A A Pres s th e { { { { Shift } } } } key to switch be- tween uppercas e and lo wercase. B B B B Pre ss a Quic k Dia l keys . A letter i s entered and the c ursor moves along one sp ace. Note ❒ To enter a character repeat edly, repea t step B .
85 7. Security Secur ity Confidential information is always at risk of being copied w ithout permission or subject t o unauthor ized access through the ne twork. To p rotect doc uments from such int rusion , no t onl y can passw ords be s et, b ut a lso th e Ext ende d Sec urity function ca n be used to str engthen security.
Security 86 7 A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sele ct [ Syste m Set tings ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and th en pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. C C C C Sele ct [ Key Operator Tool s ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Operatin g Enviro nment and Notes 87 7 Operating Environment and Notes Security for this machine is assured o n the premis es that the machine is u sed un- der the foll owing conditi ons: Oper ati ng En viro nm ent • The condit ion of the mac hine is norm al.
Security 88 7 StellaC2_AEzen_F_FM.boo k Page 88 Monda y, December 22, 2003 2:1 5 PM.
89 8. Specifications Main Unit ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Confi gura tion: Desktop ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Photosensitivity type: OPC drum ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Original s canning: One-dimensional solid scanning system throug.
Specificat ions 90 8 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Copy paper s ize: • Tray: A4 L , B5 JI S L , A5 K , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" L , 5 1 / 2 " × 8 1 / 2 " K , 16K L • Bypass: A4 L , A5 KL , B5 JIS L.
Main U nit 91 8 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Copy paper capacity: • Tray 1: 25 0 sheets (80 g/m 2 , 20 lb) • Bypass: 100 sheets (80 g/m 2 , 20 lb) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Power co nsumptio n: *1 Main uni t with the ADF, fax unit, printer/sc anner unit, and paper tray u nit.
Specificat ions 92 8 Other Items Auto Document Feeder (ADF) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Mode : • ADF mode ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Origin al size: • A4 L – A5 KL • 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L – 5 1 / 2 " .
Other It ems 93 8 Paper Tr ay Unit (Tray 2) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Paper w eight: 60 – 90 g/m 2 (16 – 24 lb.) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Paper size: A4 L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14 " L , 8 1 / 2 " × 13".
Specificat ions 94 8 Copy Paper Recommended Paper Sizes and Ty pes The fol lowin g limi tati ons app ly to each tr ay: *1 Paper weight: 80 g/m 2 , 20 lb *2 When you set custom size paper in the bypass tray, Yo u can specify the size. See Copy Reference .
Copy Paper 95 8 Important ❒ If you use damp or curled p aper, a misfeed might occur. In such a case, try turning over the paper stack in the paper tray. If there is no improvement, change to copy pap er with l ess cur l. Note ❒ When using t he bypass tray, we recom mend you set the c opy paper direct ion to L .
Specificat ions 96 8 Note ❒ Do not use any of the following kinds of paper o r a misfeed mi ght occur. • Bent, fo lded, or c reased paper • Torn pa per • Slippe ry paper • Perforated pap er .
97 INDEX A Accessing User To ols (System Se ttings) , 26 Address B ook , 42 Print List , 37 Address B ook Manage ment , 36 ADF , 13 , 92 AOF (A lways O n) , 37 Auto Document F eeder , 13 , 92 Auto off.
98 K Key Count er Manage ment , 33 Key Operator Code , 33 Key Operator Tools , 33 Key Repeat , 28 L Lower ri ght cove r , 12 M Main po wer in dicator , 11 Main po wer switch , 11 Main unit , 89 Measur.
99 MEMO StellaC2_AEzen_F_FM.boo k Page 99 Monda y, December 22, 2003 2:1 5 PM.
100 AE AE B129-6708 MEMO StellaC2_AEzen_F_FM.boo k Page 100 Monday, December 22, 2003 2:15 PM.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book= 108 // P rint scal e=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thick ness / 2 = 4.320000 mm In accor dance wi th IEC 6 0417, thi s machine u ses the f ollowi ng symbols for th e main pow er switc h: a a a a means POWER O N.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book= 108 // P rint scal e=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thick ness / 2 = 4.320000 mm Operat ing Instr uctions General Settings Guide Read th is manual caref ully bef ore you use th is prod uct and keep i t handy for fut ure refe rence.
Paper t ype: Wood Fre e 80g/m2, P aper Thickn ess=100 µ m // Pages in book=64 // Print scale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thick ness / 2 = 3.200000 mm 1515/1515PS/1515F/1 515MF Operatin g Instructions Copy Reference RICO H COMP ANY, LT D.
Paper t ype: Wood Fre e 80g/m2, P aper Thickn ess=100 µ m // Pages in book=64 // Print scale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thick ness / 2 = 3.
i Manuals f or This M achine The following manuals describe the oper ational procedures of this ma chine. For particular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual. Note ❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine ty pe. ❒ Adobe Acr obat Reader is nec essary to view t he manuals as a PDF file.
ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBind er V2 Lite DeskTopB inder V2 Lit e is a ut ility included o n the CD-ROM label ed "Scann er Driv er & Docu men t Mana geme nt Ut ilit ies".
iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machin e ...... ..... ........ ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ . i Notice ........ ..... ........ ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ .
iv 3. Troubleshootin g If Your Machi ne Does Not Opera te As You Want... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ...... ... 33 When a Message Is Dis played............. .......... ....... .......... ....... .......... ...... .......... ........ 3 3 If You Cannot Ma ke Clear Copi es.
1 Notice Importa nt Do not m ake copies of any item for w hich copying is proh ibited by law. Copying the following items is norma lly prohi bited by local law: Bank billes, revenue stamp s, bonds, stock certificates, bank drafts, checks, pass- port s, d riv er' s li cens es.
2 How to Read This Manual Symb ols The f ollowing se t of sy mbols is u sed in thi s manual . R WARNING: This symbol ind icates a potentially hazardous situation that migh t result in death or serious i njury when you misuse the mac hine without following t he in- struc tions under thi s symb ol.
3 Safety Information When using th is machine, the fol lowing safety precautions shoul d always be fol- lowed. Safety Duri ng Operation In th is manu al, the f ollowing i mportant symbo ls are used : .
4 R CAUT ION: • Protect the machine from dampness or wet wea ther, such as rain and snow. • Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving the machine, you should take care that the po wer cord will not be damag ed under the machin e.
5 Positions of R R R R WARNING and R R R R CAUTION Labels This ma chine h as la bels for R WARN ING and R CAUTION at the positions shown below. For safety, please follo w the instructions and handl e the machine as indi cated. The ins ide of this machine gets very hot.
6 Note ❒ The anti-condensati on heater is optional. For details, contact your service rep- resentat ive. StellaC2_GBcopy_F1_pre_FM.bo ok Page 6 Tuesday, Decemb er 16, 2003 4:39 PM.
7 Control Panel ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Copi er only ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Fax, printer and/or scann er installed 1. { { { { Copy } } } } key Press to activate t he copier func tion. 2. Indicators Display errors and ma chine status. • h : Error indicator See “ Control Panel ” , Genera l Setting s Guide .
8 10. On i n dic ator Lights when the operation switch is on. Referenc e p.10 “ Turning On the Power ” 11. Oper ation swi tch Press to turn the power on. The On indi- cator lights. To tu rn the power off, press agai n. Note ❒ This key is inactivate during scanning or while setting defaults.
9 Reading the Display and Using Keys The display is not to uch sensitive. Use the following keys to select the keys and items displayed on the screen. 1.
10 Turning On t he Powe r This machi ne has two power swit ch- es. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Operation swit ch (right side of the contr ol pan el) Press to activate the machine.
11 Turni ng Off the Po wer A A A A Make sure the exp osure glas s cov- er, or ADF (Auto Docu ment Feed- er) is in the right position. B B B B Press the operation switch.
12 Saving Energy • Low Power/ Auto Off The machine automatically enters Low Power mode automatically after a jo b is finis hed, and the se- lected time elapsed . After a spec ified period has passed, follow ing job completion, the mach ine auto matic ally turns off, in order to conserve energy.
13 1. Placing Originals Origina ls Sizes a nd Weights of Recommended Originals ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Metric version ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Inch version Note ❒ Abo ut 3 0 ori gin als c an b e pl aced in th e AD F.
Placing Origi nals 14 1 Note ❒ The ori ginal mi ght becom e dirty if it is writte n with a pencil o r a simil ar tool. Sizes Sele ctable as Regul ar Size Originals Yo u can s elec t the f ollow ing .
Placin g Originals 15 1 Placing Or iginals Note ❒ Take care to plac e origi nals only af - ter any corr ection fluid and ink has completel y dried. N ot taking this prec aution cou ld cause ma rks on the exposure glass that will be cop- ied on to pape r.
Placing Origi nals 16 1 Placing Ori ginals in the ADF Note ❒ Do not st ack orig inals ove r the li m- it mark on the side fence of the ADF. ❒ The last page should be on the bot- tom. ❒ Do not place anything on the ADF cover, doing so coul d cau se a mal- function.
Placin g Originals 17 1 D D D D Select the paper size using the scroll key s, and t hen press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Accept ed ” message a ppears. When the regul ar size origin als settings are registered , appears at the top of the c opy dis- play.
Placing Origi nals 18 1 D D D D Enter the horizontal size of the original using the number key s, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ If you make a m istake, press the { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key, and then enter the value again.
19 2. Copying Basi c Procedure A A A A If th e machine has use r cod es se t, enter a user code (up to eight dig- its) using the number keys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } or { { { { # } } } } key. The ma chine is ready to copy. Referen ce For user co des, see “ Key Oper a- tor Tools ” , Gene ral Settings Guide .
Copying 20 2 Copying from the By pass Tray Use th e bypass tray to copy ont o OHP transpa rencies, th ick pap er, enve - lopes and copy paper that cannot be loaded in the paper trays. Important ❒ Paper of 357 mm in length, or larg- er, is li kely to jam, creas e, or not feed in pr operly.
Copying f rom the Bypass Tray 21 2 C C C C Insert the p aper with the side you want to copy facing down, and then adjust the paper guide with the paper si ze. 1. Horizontal size 2. Vertical size 3. Extender 4. Paper guid es Note ❒ If the guides are not flush against the copy paper, images might be skew ed or paper mi s- feeds might occur.
Copying 22 2 When copying onto regular size pa per A A A A Make sur e the b ypa ss tr ay i s se- lected. Note ❒ If any other paper tray is sele ct- ed, using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } to sele ct the bypass tray. B B B B Pre ss th e { { { { # } } } } key .
Copying f rom the Bypass Tray 23 2 F F F F Enter the vertical size of the origi- nal using the number ke ys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Accept ed ” message a ppears. When copying onto special pap er A A A A Make sur e the b ypa ss tr ay i s se- lected.
Copying 24 2 E E E E Select the envelope si ze from [ C6 env L L L L ] [ C5 env L L L L ] [ DL env L L L L ] , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Copier Fu nctions 25 2 Copier Functi ons Adjustin g Image Densi ty You can adj ust copy image de nsity to match your or igina ls. If you require darker or lighter cop- ies, adjust image density accordingly. A A A A Pre ss t he { { { { Lighter } } } } or { { { { Darker } } } } key to adjust the density.
Copying 26 2 Selecting Copy Paper Choose the tr ay containing the paper you want to copy onto: a pape r tray or the bypass tray. A A A A Select t he paper tra y or bypass tray using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } . The selected tray and the paper size appear.
Copier Fu nctions 27 2 C C C C Select a ratio using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Accept ed ” message a ppears. D D D D Place your originals, and th en pre ss th e { { { { Start } } } } key.
Copying 28 2 Sor t You can scan origin als into mem ory and automatically sort copies. Copies are assembled as sequentially ordere d s ets. A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { Sort } } } } key. Note ❒ When can celing the Sor t func- tion, pres s the { { { { Sor t } } } } key, and make sure the { { { { Sort } } } } key indi ca- tor is o ff.
Copier Fu nctions 29 2 Duplex ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ 1 Sided → → → → 2 Sided Copies 2 one-sided pa ges onto 1 two-si ded page . Original o rientation and completed copies The r esulting copy image wi ll diffe r according to the orientation in which you place th e originals (vertical K or horizontal L ).
Copying 30 2 B Select t he copy orie ntation us - ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Accepted ” message ap- pear s. B B B B Place your originals. When placing originals on the exposure glass A Place the original, and th en press th e { { { { Sta rt } } } } key.
Copier Fu nctions 31 2 To select the orientation Note ❒ You can se lect th e origin al ori- entation when [ Alwa ys Spec ify ] is selected in [ Orient ation ] under [ Copier Features ] (User Tools).
Copying 32 2 To select the orientation Note ❒ You can se lect th e origin al ori- entation when [ Alwa ys Spec ify ] is selected in [ Orient ation ] under [ Copier Features ] (User Tools).
33 3. Troubleshooting If Your Mac hine Does Not Operate As You Want When a Message Is Dis played The following chart cont ains explanations for common messages. If other mes- sages appear, follow the instr uctions as they are displayed. Note ❒ For messages not listed here, see General Set tings Guide .
Troublesh ooting 34 3 If You Cannot Make C lear Copies Prob lem Ca uses Sol utio ns Copies appear dirty . Image density is too dark. Adjust the image density. S ee p.25 “ Adjusting Image Density ” . The reverse side of an orig- inal image is copied.
If You Cannot Ma ke Copies As You Wan t 35 3 If You Cannot Make Copies As You Want This section e xplains causes and remedies whe n copy results are not as expec t- ed. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Basic ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Combine ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Duplex Prob lem Ca uses Sol utio ns You can not combi ne sever- al fu nct io ns.
Troublesh ooting 36 3 When Memor y Is Ful l Messa ges Cause s Solution s Memory i s ful l. [Prin t] sc anned orig., [C lear ] to cance l/cle ar memory. [ Clear ][ Pr int ] Note ❒ Copying will stop and this messag e will be displayed whe n the memory is ful l.
B Loading Paper 37 3 B B B B Loading Paper Referenc e For paper types and sizes, see Gen- eral Settings Guide . Loading Paper Note ❒ You can change the paper size, see General Settings Guid e . ❒ This illust ration show s Tray 1. A A A A Pull the paper tray out slowly un- til it stops.
Troublesh ooting 38 3 D D D D Adding Toner When D appea rs, it is time to add ton er. Handling Toner R WARNING: R CAUTIO N: Important ❒ Faults may occur if you use toner other t han the reco mmended type. ❒ When addin g toner, do not turn off the operation swit ch.
Removing Tone r 39 3 Removing Toner • 1: Open the fron t cover of the machine. • 2: Lift the green le ver. • 3: Push the green lever, and then gently pull out the h older. • 4: Press the toner bottle back to raise its top, and then gently pu ll it out.
Troublesh ooting 40 3 Inserting Toner • 1: Hold the new bottle hori zontally and shake it from side to side five or six times. 2: Remove the black cap. Note ❒ Do not remove the black cap before shak ing . ❒ Do not remove the inner cap. • 3: Put the toner bottle on the holder, and then pull its top forwar d.
41 4. User Tools (Copier Features) Accessi ng User T ools (Copi er Features) This sectio n is for key operator s in charge of this machine. Key operators can change o r make default settings. Note ❒ B e s u r e t o q u i t U s e r T o o l s a n d r e - turn to the init ial copy display when all settings ar e complete.
User Tools (Co pier Featur es) 42 4 D D D D Change settings by following in- struction s on the dis play, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ Programmed ” m essage ap- pears. Note ❒ To discontinue the op eration and retu rn to the initial d isplay, press the { { { { User Tools /Counter } } } } key.
Settings Yo u Can Change w ith User Tools 43 4 Settings You Can C hange with User Tools Auto Tray Switch ing If you load paper of the same size and in the s ame orientation in two trays, the machine autom atically shifts to the other tray when the first t ray runs out of paper.
User Tools (Co pier Featur es) 44 4 Orie ntatio n • You ca n select the origin al orie nta- tion when makin g Combine cop- ies. Note ❒ Default: Do not Specify ❒ When you s ele ct [ A lways Speci fy ] , you must select the orientation of origin als.
Settings Yo u Can Change w ith User Tools 45 4 Preset R/E Priorit y You can set the ratio with priority when [ R/ E ] is selected. Note ❒ Default: • Metr ic vers ion: 71% • Inch ver sion: 65% Dup lex Mar gin You can specify left margin on the bac k side of co pies , and top marg in on th e fron t sid e.
User Tools (Co pier Featur es) 46 4 Stel laC2_GB copy_F 1_pre _FM.book Page 46 Tues day, Dec ember 16, 20 03 4:3 9 PM.
47 5. Remarks Do's and Don'ts R CAUTIO N: Important ❒ Do not tu rn the power off while the On indicator is lit or blinking. Doi ng so ma y dama ge th e memo- ry. ❒ Before unplugging th e power co rd or turning off the m ain power switch, make sure remaining memory space is at 100%, as shown on the di splay.
Remarks 48 5 Where to P ut Your Machine Machi ne En viron ment Choose your m achi ne's locati on ca re- fully. Environmental conditions greatly affect its p erformance. Optimum environm ental conditions R CAUTIO N: R CAUTIO N: • Temperature: 10- 32 ° C (50-89.
Where to Put Your Machine 49 5 Moving R CAUTIO N: R CAUTIO N: Important ❒ Be careful when m oving the ma- chine. Take the following prec au- tions: • Turn off the main powe r. Se e p.11 “ Tur ning Off the Ma in Power ” . • Unplu g the po wer co rd from the wall outlet .
Remarks 50 5 Access to the Machine Plac e the ma chine nea r th e power source, pr oviding the clearance ar eas shown. 1. Rear : 1 cm (0.4") or mo re 2.
Mainta ining Your Machin e 51 5 Maintaining Yo ur Machine If the exposure glass, ex posure glass co v er , o r A DF be l t is d ir ty , c op y c la ri - ty may be reduced. Clean these parts if they are d irty. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Cleani ng the machine Wipe the machine with a soft, damp cloth.
Remarks 52 5 Stel laC2_GB copy_F 1_pre _FM.book Page 52 Tues day, Dec ember 16, 20 03 4:3 9 PM.
53 6. Specifications Combination C hart The combination ch art below shows which functions can be used together. When you read the chart, see the following table: The f ollowi ng shows th e combin ation s of functi ons. ❍ These functions can be used together .
Specificat ions 54 6 Supplemen tary Information ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Bypass Tray Copy • The following paper sizes can be selected as standard sizes: A4 L , A5 KL , B5 JI S L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14" .
Supplemen tary Info rmation 55 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Inch version ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Zoom • The repr oduction ratios you can s pecify ar e 50 – 200%. • You can s elect a rat io regard less of the siz e of an or iginal or copy paper . With so me ratios , parts of the im age might not be copi ed or ma rgins w ill appear o n copies.
Specificat ions 56 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Combine • When usi ng this function, the machine selects the rep roduction ra tio auto- matical ly. This reprodu ction rati o depe nds on origi nal siz es, if spec ified, or copy pa per size s.
57 INDEX 1 sided 2 pag es → combine 1 side , 30 1 sided 4 pag es → combine 2 side , 31 1 sided → 2 si ded , 29 A Accessing U ser Tools , 41 Adding toner , 38 ADF , 16 Adju stin g im age d ensi t.
58 P Pap er loading , 37 Pho to , 25 Placing cus tom size originals , 17 Plac ing o rigin als , 15 in ADF , 16 on exposure g lass , 15 Placing regular size ori ginals , 16 Pow er , 10 Pow er co nne ct.
59 MEMO Stel laC2_GB copy_F 1_pre _FM.book Page 59 Tues day, Dec ember 16, 20 03 4:3 9 PM.
60 GB GB B129-66 00 MEMO Stel laC2_GB copy_F 1_pre _FM.book Page 60 Tues day, Dec ember 16, 20 03 4:3 9 PM.
Paper t ype: Wood Fre e 80g/m2, P aper Thickn ess=100 µ m // Pages in book=64 // Print scale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thick ness / 2 = 3.
Paper t ype: Wood Fre e 80g/m2, P aper Thickn ess=100 µ m // Pages in book=64 // Print scale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thick ness / 2 = 3.200000 mm 1515/1515PS/1515F/1 515MF Operatin g Instructions Copy Reference RICO H COMP ANY, LT D.
Paper t ype: Wood Fre e 80g/m2, P aper Thickn ess=100 µ m // Pages in book=48 // Print scale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 0 mm Operating In struction.
Paper t ype: Wood Fre e 80g/m2, P aper Thickn ess=100 µ m // Pages in book=48 // Print scale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 0 mm Declar ation of Confor.
i Manuals f or This M achine The following manuals describe the oper ational procedures of this ma chine. For particular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual. Note ❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine ty pe. ❒ Adobe Acr obat Reader is nec essary to view t he manuals as a PDF file.
ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBind er V2 Lite Desk Top Binde r V2 L ite is a ut ilit y incl uded on th e CD- ROM l abe led “ Scanner Driv er & Docu men t Mana geme nt Ut ilit ies ” .
iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machin e ...... ..... ........ ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ . i How to Read Thi s Manual . ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ........ ..... ........ ..... .....
iv Stel laC2-GB- Pref1 -F3_FM_ ZF.book Page i v Fri day, No vember 2 1, 200 3 8:42 PM.
1 How to Read This Manual Symb ols In th is manual, the following sym bols are used: R WARNING: This symbo l indicates a potentially h azardous situation wh ich, if instructions are not follow ed, c ould resu lt in deat h or seriou s in jury .
2 Names of Major Compone nts and Softwar e The followi ng software products are r eferred to using a general name : • DeskTopBinder V2 Lite and DeskTopBinder V2 professional → DeskTop- Binde r V2 .
3 1. Getting Started Control Panel 1. { { { { Printer } } } } key Press to activate the printer func tion. 2. Indicators Displays errors and ma chine status. h : Error indicator. S ee Ne twork G uide and Gen eral Settings Guide . B : Load Paper indicator.
Getting Sta rted 4 1 Reading t he Display and Using Keys This section explains how to r ead the display and using the selection ke y for the initia l display . Note ❒ The copy displ ay is set as the d efault sc reen whe n the machi ne is turned on. You can change the set tings in [ System Se ttings ] .
5 2. Preparin g to Print This section gi ves instructions for connecting the machine and computer, config- uring the m achine, and installing so ftware.
Preparing to Print 6 2 Preparing the Machine Conn ecti ng t he Machi ne Referenc e For infor mation abou t connection using Ethern et and wirele ss LAN, see "Confirming the Connection", Networ k Guid e . For informa tion about connection using Bluet ooth TM , see the manual that co mes with t he optional Blue- tooth interface u nit.
Prepari ng the Machine 7 2 Connecting the Machine to the hos t using the parall el cable/IEEE 1394 (SCSI print) c able Connect the machin e to the host com- puter using t he optional IEEE 1284 in- terface board or optional IEEE 1394 inte rface boa rd.
Preparing to Print 8 2 Setting Pape r on the Bypass Tra y This sect ion giv es instru ctions for set- ting pa per on t he bypass tray. Us e the bypa ss tray to print ont o OHP tra ns- parencie s, labels , thick pap er, and en- velopes that cann ot be loaded in the paper t ray.
Prepari ng the Machine 9 2 C C C C Gentl y insert pape r face down into the bypass tray. 1. Extender 2. Paper guid es Note ❒ Do not stack paper over the lim- it mark, othe rwise a skewed im- age or misf eed s migh t oc cur. ❒ Open out the ext ender to sup - port paper size s larger than A4 L , 8 1 / 2 " × 11" L .
Preparing to Print 10 2 D Select [ Bypass P aper Siz e ] , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key. E Select t he pape r size usi ng { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ When print ing onto thick p a- per or OH P transpar encies, selec t the pape r type .
Prepari ng the Machine 11 2 G G G G Enter the horizontal size of the pape r usin g the numbe r keys , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. H H H H Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. Setting thick paper or OHP transparencies Note ❒ Paper settings ca n also be set using the printer driver.
Preparing to Print 12 2 Setting envelopes A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sele ct [ Syst em Set ting s ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key .
Install ing the Sof tware 13 2 Installing the Softwar e This manual assumes you ar e familiar with general Windows procedures and practices. If you a re not, see th e operating instructions that come w ith Windows for details. The proc edure for installing the p rint- er driver depends on th e connection with the co mputer.
Preparing to Print 14 2 The f ollow ing ta ble sh ows the print er driver s and sof tware that can be in- stalled using Auto Run: *1 Available operating systems are: Win- dows 95/98 /Me, Windows 2000 /XP, Windows Serv er 2003, and Windows NT 4.0. Auto Run i s unav ailable with Macint osh.
Install ing the Sof tware 15 2 Important ❒ If your system is Windows NT 4.0, we recommend that you upgra de the W indows NT 4 .0 operat ing s y s te m t o S e r v i c e P a c k 4 o r l a t e r before installing the PCL 6/5e or RPCS ™ printer drivers.
Preparing to Print 16 2 • Win dows XP Profe ssional and Windows Server 2003 On the [ Start ] menu, click [ Printers and Faxe s ] . Th e [ Print- ers and Faxes ] window ap- pears. Ri ght-click the mach ine ic on, an d the n click [ Rename ] . • Windows XP Home E dition On th e [ Start ] men u, click [ Control Pa nel ] .
Install ing the Sof tware 17 2 • Windows NT 4.0 PCL 6: DRIVERSPCL6 NT4(Language)DIS K1 PCL 5e: DRIVERSPCL5E NT4(Language)DIS K1 RPCS ™ : DRIVERSRPCS NT4(Language)DIS K1 A A A A Quit all applications running. B B B B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD- ROM drive.
Preparing to Print 18 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ NetB EU I A Click [ NetBEUI ] , and then click [ Se arch ] . A li st of mac hine s that c an be used with Net BEUI ap- pears. B Select the machine yo u want to use, and then c lick [ OK ] . Note ❒ NetBEU I cannot be used under Windows XP or Windows Server 2003.
Install ing the Sof tware 19 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ User Code User codes are ei ght digit codes that allow you to keep track of printing done under each code. To use thi s feature, the net work administrator sh ould assign user codes a nd inform users of them before they install the print er driver .
Preparing to Print 20 2 Note ❒ If you cannot set the items on the [ Reco very/Parallel Printi ng ] tab, follow th e procedure be- low. A Click [ Cancel ] to c lose the [ Port Setti ngs ] dia log box . B Start Smar tDeviceMonitor for Clie nt, and th en right- click the SmartDevice- Monitor fo r Client i con on the tas kbar.
Install ing the Sof tware 21 2 RPCS ™ prin ter dri ver A A A A On the [ Star t ] menu, point to [ Set - tings ] , and then click [ Pr inters ] . The [ Prin ters ] window appears. Note ❒ If using Windows XP Profes- sional or Windows Server 2003, click the [ Print ers and Faxes ] win- dow on the [ Star t ] men u.
Preparing to Print 22 2 Note ❒ The prin ter driver with t he se- lec ted la ngu age wi ll b e in - stalled. ❒ The pri nter drive r will be in - stalled in English if you select the following languages: Cesti- na, Magya r, Polski , Portug ues, Suomi, an d Russi an.
Install ing the Sof tware 23 2 A A A A Quit all applications that are ru n- ning . B B B B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD- ROM drive. Auto Run wil l star t the in stall er. C C C C Select a langua ge for the interface language, an d then click [ OK ] .
Preparing to Print 24 2 A A A A On the [ Star t ] menu, point to [ Set - tings ] , and then click [ Pr inters ] . The [ Prin ters ] window appears. Note ❒ In Window s XP Professional or Windows Server 2003, clic k the [ Printers and Fa xes ] window on the [ Start ] men u.
Install ing the Sof tware 25 2 Note ❒ The prin ter driver with t he se- lec ted la ngu age wi ll b e in - stalled. ❒ The pri nter drive r will be in - stalled in English if you select the following languages: Cesti- na, Magya r, Polski , Portug ues, Suomi, an d Russi an.
Preparing to Print 26 2 • When bidirec tional t ransmission is running, machin e status and infor- mation can be viewed by opening the prin ter driver screen. To s upport bid irectiona l transm is- sion, the follow ing conditions ar e re- quired : ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When connecting with USB 2.
Install ing the Sof tware 27 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When conn ecting with a paral lel cable • The comp uter must sup port bi- direct ional transm ission. • The mac hine must be set to bidi - rectio nal transmissi on.
Preparing to Print 28 2 C C C C In the [ Se lect a P ostScript Printer : ] list, click th e name of the mac hine you wa nt to use . D D D D Click [ Setup ] . E E E E Click [ Select PPD ... ] . F F F F Click the prin ter description file you want to use, and then click [ Select ] .
Install ing the Sof tware 29 2 Installing screen fonts A A A A Start the Macintosh. B B B B Insert the CD-ROM into the CD- ROM drive. C C C C Double-click the CD-ROM icon. D D D D Do uble -c lic k the [ Mac OS 8 and 9 ] folder. E E E E Do uble -c lick th e [ Fonts ] folder.
Preparing to Print 30 2 Instal ling the Printer Dri ver Using USB This sect ion gi ves basic instruct ions for i nstal ling prin ter d river s us ing USB.
Install ing the Sof tware 31 2 Windows 2000/XP and Wi ndows Server 2003 - Installing the printer driver using USB Limitatio n ❒ Insta lling a pr inter dr iver requires the Administrators permission. Whe n yo u in sta ll a pri nte r dr iver , log on using an accou nt that has Administrator permission.
Preparing to Print 32 2 H H H H Close the Desktop P rinter Utility. Instal ling the Printer Dri ver Using IEEE 1394 Printing usi ng a SCSI pr int device with the option al IEEE 1394 inter face board i s possible u nder Windows 2000/XP or Windows Server 2003.
Install ing the Sof tware 33 2 E E E E Hold down the left { { { { SHI FT } } } } key and in sert t he CD-R OM into the CD-ROM drive. Keep the left { { { { SHIFT } } } } key held down unt il the computer has fin- ished accessing the CD-ROM. If the Auto Run program starts, click [ Cancel ] , an d then cl ick [ Exit ] .
Preparing to Print 34 2 • Window s Me A In the [ Add New Hardwar e Wiz- ard ] dialo g box, confirm that [ Windows ha s found the fol low- ing new Hardware: IEEE SBP-2 Device ] is d ispla yed, a nd click [ Recom mende d search fo r a bet- ter driver [ Recommended] ] , and then click [ Next ] .
Install ing the Sof tware 35 2 D When “ Driver Files Searc h Res ults ” appears, click [ Disa- ble the device. The Add /Remove Hardware Wizard i n the Control Pane l ca n be used to c omple te the driver installations. ] , and then click [ Finish ] .
Preparing to Print 36 2 C C C C Select a langua ge for the interface language, an d then click [ OK ] . The following l anguages are avail- able: Cestina ( Czech), Dansk (Dan- ish), Deut sch (Germ an).
Softwar e and Utilities Included on t he CD-ROM 37 2 Software and Utilit ies Included on the CD- ROM There ar e two CD-R OMs t hat come with this mac hine. • Printer Drivers and Ut ilities • Operating Instructions for Print- er/Scanner The C D-R OM la bel ed “ Printer Driv- ers and Util ities ” is m ainly used for machine printer functions.
Preparing to Print 38 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ PCL printer dri vers Two kin ds of PCL prin ter d rivers : PCL 6 and PCL 5e, are i ncluded on the CD- ROM th at com es with this machine . These drive rs allow the computer to communicat e with the machin e via a printer lan- guage.
Softwar e and Utilities Included on t he CD-ROM 39 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ USB Print ing Sup port This ut ility is for t he USB 2 .0 int er- face. Install this to use USB on compute rs ru nning Wi ndow s 98 SE/Me. For information a bout in- stalla tion, see p.
40 INDEX 1394 Util ity , 38 A Acrobat R eader , 39 ATM Macintosh, installing , 28 B Bidire ctional tran smission , 25 Bypass tray , 8 C CD-ROM , 37 Connection Eth ernet bo ard c onnec ti on , 6 IEEE 1.
41 S Screen fonts Macintosh, installing , 29 SCSI p rint , 32 Sma rtDev iceMo nit or fo r Admi n , 35 , 38 Sma rtDev iceMo nit or for Clie nt , 35 , 38 Software Quick Install , 14 T Thick Pa per print.
42 MEMO Stel laC2-GB- Pref1 -F3_FM_ ZF.book Page 4 2 Fri day, Nov ember 21, 2003 8:42 PM.
43 MEMO Stel laC2-GB- Pref1 -F3_FM_ ZF.book Page 4 3 Fri day, Nov ember 21, 2003 8:42 PM.
44 GB GB B683-86 17 MEMO Stel laC2-GB- Pref1 -F3_FM_ ZF.book Page 4 4 Fri day, Nov ember 21, 2003 8:42 PM.
Paper t ype: Wood Fre e 80g/m2, P aper Thickn ess=100 µ m // Pages in book=48 // Print scale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 0 mm Declar ation of Confor.
Paper t ype: Wood Fre e 80g/m2, P aper Thickn ess=100 µ m // Pages in book=48 // Print scale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Paper thickness / 2 = 0 mm Operating In struction.
Operating I nstructions Printer Reference 2 For safe and correct use of this machine, please be sure to read the Safety Information in the "Copy Referen ce" before you use it.
Introduction This manu al descri bes detail ed instruc tions o n the operatio n and no tes about the use of this m achine. To get m aximum versat ility fro m this mach ine all operators are requested to read this m anual c arefull y and follo w the in structi ons.
i Manuals for This Machine The following manuals describe the operational procedures of this machine. For particular function s, see the relevant parts of the manual. Note ❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine type. ❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader is n ecessary to view the manuals as a PDF file.
ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBinde r V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is a u tility included on the CD-ROM labeled “ Scanner Driver & Document Manag ement Utilities ” . • DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2) Describes i nstallation of, and the operating env ironment for DeskTop- Binder V2 Lite in d etail.
iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machine ...... ....... ....... ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... ...... i How to Read Thi s Manual ...... ....... ......... ......... ....... ........... .......... ......... ...
iv.
1 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the following sy mbols are used: R WARNING: This sym bol indicates a potentia lly hazardo us situat ion which, if instruction s are not followed, could result in death or serious inj ury.
2 Major Components and Sof tware Major options of this machine are referred to as follows in this manual: • IEEE 1394 In terface Board Type B → IEEE 1394 in terface board • IEEE 802.
3 1. Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job Accessing Printer Properties Windows 95/98/ Me - Accessing Pri nter Propert ies Changing default settings A A A A On the [ Sta rt ] menu, point to [ Set- tings ] , and then click [ Pr int ers ] .
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 4 1 Windows 2000/XP and Windows Server 2003 - Accessing Pri nter Propert ies Changing default settings - Printer properties Limita tion ❒ Chan ging mac hine se tti ngs re quir es Manage Prin ters permissi on.
Accessing Printer Properties 5 1 D D D D Make the settings you requ ire, and then click [ OK ] . Note ❒ Settings you make her e are used as default for all applic ations. Making se ttings from an application To make settings for a specific appli- cation, o pen the [ Prin t ] dialog box from that app licat ion.
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 6 1 Changing the default set tings - Default document propertie s Limita tion ❒ Chan ging mac hine se tti ngs re quir es Full Control access permission.
Accessing Printer Properties 7 1 Macintosh - Setting Up for Printi ng Making paper s ettings from an application A A A A Open the file you w ant to print. B B B B On the [ File ] menu, click [ Page Set - up ] . The [ AdobePS Page Setup ] dialog box appears.
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 8 1 Canceling a Print Job Windows - Can celing a Prin t Job A A A A Double-click the printer icon on the Windows taskbar. A window appears, showing all print jobs curre ntly que ued for printing.
Canceling a Print Job 9 1 Macintosh - Cancel ing a Print Job Mac OS A A A A Double-click the printer icon on the desktop. A window appears, showing all print jobs curre ntly que ued for printing. Check the current status of th e job you wan t to ca ncel.
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 10 1 G G G G Press [ Curre nt ] . • [ Current ] : cancel s the print job currently being process ed. • [ Resume ] : resumes printing jobs. A confirmation message appears. H H H H Press [ Yes ] to cancel the print job.
11 2. Troubleshooting Error & Status Messages on the Display This section describe s the principal me ssages that appear on the displ ay. If a message not described here a ppears, act acco rding to the message. Reference Before turning the main power off, see ‘ Tur ning On the Powe r ’ , Co py Refer- ence .
Troubleshooting 12 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Alert me ssages Messages/Second m essages Causes Solutions Add ton er Out of toner. Follow instructions inside and replace toner.
Error & Status Messages on the Display 13 2 Ethernet Board Err or An error ha s occurred in the Ethernet interface. Turn off the ma in power switc h, and b ack on again . If the me ssage appe ars aga in, contact your sa les or se rvice representative.
Troubleshooting 14 2 Paper Tray is in us e. The specified paper tray is in use by another function, such as the copier function. Wait until the othe r function has finished using the speci- fied pap er tray. D Toner is almost em pty Add ton er The toner has almos t run out.
The Machine Does Not Print 15 2 The Machine Do es Not Print Possible Ca use Solutions Is the power on? Check the cable is securely plugged into the power outlet and the machine. Turn on the main power switch. Is the machine online? If not, press { { { { f f f f Online } } } } on the control panel.
Troubleshooting 16 2 When using wireless LAN, is the LED on the wireless LAN card lit or blinking? Confirm the orange LED is lit, and the green LED is lit or blinks during transm ission. Is the wireless LAN being used in ad hoc mode? Turn the main pow er off and back on.
The Machine Does Not Print 17 2 Problem Soluti ons Is the Data In indicator blinking or lit after starting the p rin t job ? If not, data is not being sent t o the machine. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When the machine is c onnected to the comput er using the interf ace cable Check the machine port set tings are correct.
Troubleshooting 18 2 Is the Data In indicator blinking or lit after starting the p rin t job ? ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Network connection Contact your network adminis trator.
Other Printing Problems 19 2 Other Printing Problems Problem Causes and Sol utions The print on the entire pa ge is fad- ed. If [ T oner Sav ing ] is selected on the [ Print Qualit y ] tab in the p rinter driver, the entire page will be faded when printed.
Troubleshooting 20 2 When using Win- dows 95/98/Me, Windows 2000/ XP, or Win- dows NT 4 .0, e i- ther combined printing or book- let print does not come out as ex - pecte d. Make sure the application's paper size and orientation settings match those of the printer driver.
Other Printing Problems 21 2 It tak es a lo ng time to com ple te a print jo b. Photographs and other data intens ive pages ta ke a long time for the ma- chine to process, so simp ly wait when printing such data.
Troubleshooting 22 2 Note ❒ If the problem cannot be solved, contac t your sales or servi ce representative. It takes too much time to res ume printing . The da ta i s so larg e or c omp lex that it ta kes t ime t o pr oces s. I f the Data In indicator is blinking, data is being processed.
23 3. Printer Features Reference For more information about copier features and system settings, s ee Copy Ref- erence and Gener al Settings Guide . Printer Features Menu There are seven menu i tems i.
Printer Features 24 3 System See p.31 “ Sys tem ” . Print Error Report Auto C ontinu e Memory Overflow Memory Usa ge Duplex Copies Edge Smoothing Toner Saving Pri nter Lan gua ge Sub P aper S ize Page Size Letterhead S etting Edge-Edge Print Default Printer Lang.
Adjusting Printer Features 25 3 Adjusting Printer Features Printer Features allows basic adjustment of operations when using the mac hine as a printe r. Although fact ory default settings are suitable for most printing jobs, Printer Fea- tures gives you acc ess to a number of settings that control basic printer opera- tions.
Printer Features 26 3 Printer Features Parameters Paper In put ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Bypass Paper Size The size of the paper set in the by- pass tray. Reference For more information about pa- per sizes that can be set in the bypass tray, see General Settings Gui de .
Printer Features P arameters 27 3 Interpreting the c onfiguration page System R eferenc e ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Un it N umber Displays the serial numbe r assigned to the board by its manuf acturer. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Total Memory Displays the total amount of memory (SDRA M) installed on the printer.
Printer Features 28 3 PCL Menu Displays the settings made under PCL M enu. Reference p.33 “ PCL Menu ” PS Menu Displays the settings made under PS M enu. Reference p.35 “ PS Menu ” Host Int erface Displays the settings mad e under the Host Interface men u.
Printer Features P arameters 29 3 Maintenanc e ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Menu Protect This pro ced ure lets y ou protect menu setting s from acci dental change. It makes it impossi ble to change menu setting s with normal procedures un less you perform the required key operations.
Printer Features 30 3 Canceling Menu Protec t A A A A Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key. B B B B Select [ Printer Feat ures ] us ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Printer Features P arameters 31 3 System ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Print Error Report Select this to have an error re port printed when a printer or memory error occurs. • On • Off Note ❒ Def au lt : Off ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Auto Continue You can select this to enab le Auto Con tinue.
Printer Features 32 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printer Language Normally, the machine should b e set to Au to. If the printer language cannot be detected in Auto, the langu age specifie d by Default Printer Lang.
Printer Features P arameters 33 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Edge-Edge Print Select this to maximize the printa- ble area by minim izing the white space along the edges, to approxi- mately 0.04 inches (1 mm). • Off • On Note ❒ Def au lt : Off ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Default P rinter Lang.
Printer Features 34 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Font Number You can set the ID of the def ault font you w ant to use. • 0 to 50 by 1 Note ❒ Def au lt : 0 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Point Size You can set th e point size you want to use for the selected font. • 4.00 to 999.
Printer Features P arameters 35 3 PS Menu ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Data Format You can sele ct a data fo rmat. • Binar y • TBCP Limitatio n ❒ This sett ing is no t effect ive wh en operating the machine with a paral lel, USB, or EtherTalk con- nect ion.
Printer Features 36 3.
37 4. Appendix Collate If you sele ct the collate function on t he printer driver, the machine will store print data in m emory and auto matically collate the printouts . The collate function can be turned on or off from the prin ter driver. Limita tion ❒ You cann ot use the bypas s tray with this func tion.
Appendix 38 4 User Defined Pages Using this functi on, you can s pecify the pag e numbers for each input t ray. Reference For printing methods, see the printer driver He lp.
System Settings (Parallel Connection) 39 4 System Settings (Parallel Connection) Interface Settings/Paral lel Interface ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Parallel Tim ing Specifies the timing for the para llel interface. Norma lly, you do not need to chan ge this setting .
Appendix 40 4 Specifications This se ction cont ains the machine's electrical and hardware sp ecificat ions, in- cluding information about its options.
Specifications 41 4 Options Limita tion ❒ Only one optional interface can be ins talled in the machine at a time. Th ere- fore, the optional IEEE 1394 interface board, the optional IEEE 802.
Appendix 42 4 IEEE 802. 11b Interfac e Unit T ype D ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Transm ission sp ec.: Based on IEEE 802.11b (wireless L AN) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Protocol: TCP/ IP, NetBEU I, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk Note ❒ SmartDeviceMonitor an d Web browser are supported .
43 INDEX B BlueTooth Unit Type 2238 , 42 C Canc eling a job Macin tosh , 9 Windo ws , 8 Config uration pag e , 26 Cont rol panel Printer Feat ures, adjusting , 23 D Data In indicato r , 17 , 21 , 22 D.
44 GB GB B683-8630.
Copyri ght © 2003.
Operating I nstructions Printer Reference 2 GB GB B683-8630.
Operating I nstructions Scanner Reference For safe and correct use of this machine, please be sure to read the Safety Information in the "Copy Referen ce" before you use it.
Introduction This manu al descri bes detail ed instruc tions o n the operatio n and no tes about the use of this m achine. To get m aximum versat ility fro m this mach ine all operators are requested to read this m anual c arefull y and follo w the in structi ons.
i Manuals for This Machine The following manuals describe the operational procedures of this machine. For particular function s, see the relevant parts of the manual. Note ❒ The manuals provided are s pecific to machine type. ❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader is n ecessary to view the manuals as a PDF file.
ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBinde r V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is a utility included on the CD-ROM la beled "Scanner Driver & Document Management Utilities".
iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machine ...... ....... ....... ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... ...... i How to Read Thi s Manual ...... ....... ......... ......... ....... ........... .......... ......... ...
iv 5. Using the Network Delivery Sca nner Function Preparation for Delivering .... ......... ......... ....... ......... .......... ......... ....... ......... ......... . 47 Network Delivery Scanne r Scree n ...... ......... ......... .......... ....
1 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the following sy mbols are used: Important If this instruc tion is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be damaged, or files might be lost. Be sure to read this. Preparation This symbol indicates the prior knowledge or preparations requ ired before op- erating.
2.
3 1. Network Scanner Outline The machine c an be used as a network scanne r. As a network scanner, the machi ne can send s can files by e-mail, operate as a net- work delivery sca nner, and operate as a network TWAIN scanner. E-mail Scan files that are attached to a n e-mail can be sent using the e-mail system through a LA N or the Internet.
Network Scanner 4 1 Network De livery Scanner The machine is used as a delivery scanner with ScanRouter V2 Lite/Profession- al. Scan files are stored i n the delivery server and delivered to the folders of c li- ent computers on the same network. Reference p.
Outline 5 1 Network T WAIN Scan ner The scan ning func tion of this m achine ca n be used from a client computer via a network (Ethernet, IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) [optional], or IEEE 802.11b (Wire- less LAN) [optional]). Reference p.61 “ Using the Netw ork T WAIN Scanne r Func tion ” 1.
Network Scanner 6 1 Control Panel This illustration sh ows the control panel when options ar e installed. 1. { { { { Searc h D estin atio n } } } } key Press to sea rch for th e destination fr om the Destination L ist. 2. { { { { Check Des tination } } } } key Press to check the de stinations curre ntly selected.
Control Panel 7 1 14. Qui ck Dial ke ys Press to select the registered destin ation with a sing le tou ch, or to enter lette rs and symbols. Reference For mo re info rmation , see General Settings Guide . Note ❒ You can regist er up to 16 de stinati ons using the Quick Dial keys.
Network Scanner 8 1.
9 2. Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner To use the machin e as a network scan ner, you must make settings requ ired for use as a scan ner as well as basi c settings for use in a network. Reference Firs t, se e General Settin gs Guide for details about how to m ake basic settings , and then m ake scanner setti ngs.
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 10 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Send Settings For explanations of settings, s ee p.14 “ Send Settings ” . Setting procedure A A A A Press the { { { { User Tools/Counter } } } } key.
Initial Scanner Setup 11 2 D D D D Select a setting using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. Example: TWAIN Standby Time setting E E E E Change the settings. • Se lec t an item us ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 12 2 Scan Se ttings This section explains how to set the defaults for scan settings . The scan settings consist of the fol- lowing. F or the list about settin gs and defaults, see p .9 “ Scanner Features ” .
Initial Scanner Setup 13 2 Selecti ng a cust om size When sel ect ing [ Custom Size ] as the scan size, fol low th e procedu re be- low. A A A A Select [ Cust om Size ] on t he S ca n Size screen using the scroll keys, and th en pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 14 2 Send Se ttings This section explains how to set the defaults fo r sendi ng settings and how the machine switches to the network TWAIN scan ner func tion. The send settings consist of the fol- lowing. F or the list about settin gs and defaults, see p .
Initial Scanner Setup 15 2 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Divide & Send E-mail This function is ef fective only whe n [ On ] is selecte d for [ Max. E- mail Size ] . When an e-mail with an attached file exceeds the size spec ified in [ Max. E- mail Size ] , select whether or not to divid e the file and send us - ing more than one e-mail.
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 16 2 Installing Software The m achi ne com es with three C D-RO Ms con taini ng vari ous so ftwar e. The CD-ROM labeled “ Scanner Driver & Document Management Utilities ” con- tains the necessary softw are to use the machin e as a network sc anner.
Installing Software 17 2 The install ing sequence using Auto Ru n is as follows. For information about the software that can be installed by Auto Run, see p.20 “ Software Supplied o n CD-ROM ” . Installation Sequence The installer starts up. The installation complete message is displayed.
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 18 2 Software for Usi ng a Network TWAIN Scan ner To use the ma chine as a networ k TWAI N scanner, it is esse ntial to install the TWAIN dr iver. I f y o u d o n o t h a v e a p p l i c a t i o n s t h a t w o r k w i t h T W A I N , i t i s n e c e s s a r y t o a l s o install DeskTopBinder V2 Lite.
Installing Software 19 2 Software f or Using the Network Del ivery Scanne r Function To use the machine as a network delivery sc anner, it is essential to instal l Scan- Router V2 Lite on the delivery server. To check an in-tray or retr ieve files, it is necessary to install DeskTopBinder V2 Lite on the cli ent computer.
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 20 2 Reference For information about the subsequent installation procedure, see Setup Guide that c an be d ispla yed from the S etup screen o f De skTopB inde r V2 Li te. Software Supp lied on CD-ROM List of file s TWAIN Driver This driver is requ ired to scan an original on th e machine.
Installing Software 21 2 • Memor y Operating syste m minimum operat ion memory + 8 MB (64 MB or mor e recomm ended) • Hard dis k spa ce 100 MB or more • Displa y resolutio n 800 × 600 pi xels, .
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 22 2 • Hard dis k spa ce 50 MB or more (200 MB or more recommended) • Displa y resolutio n 800 × 600 pi xels, 64K colours or higher • Network p rotocol.
Installing Software 23 2 • Hardware PC/AT compatible • CPU Pentium 200 MHz or faster (Penti um II 350 MHz or faster recommended) • Oper ating sy stem Micr osof t Wind ows 95 ( OSR 2 or la ter ) .
Preparations for Use as a Network Scanner 24 2.
25 3. Setting Originals This chapter ex plains the proced ure for placing original s on the exposure glass and in the Auto Document Feeder (ADF), and setting the original sc an area and orientation according to the placement m ethod.
Setting Originals 26 3 Placing on the Exp osure Gla ss Originals which do not fit into the ADF, such as shee ts with glue d-on parts, books, etc., can be placed di- rectly on the exposure glass for scan- ning. Note ❒ For information about the origi- nals which can be place d on th e ex- posure glass , see Copy R eference .
Placing Originals 27 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When plac ing the original so that the t op edge touches t he top left of the exposure glass Wh en us ing the mach ine as a network TWAIN sca nner, this orientation is the standard set- ting for the TWAIN d river.
Setting Originals 28 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When placing the top e dges of the originals firs t Wh en us ing the mach ine as a network TWAIN sca nner, this orientation is the standard set- ting for the TWAIN d river. Nor- mally , use t his orien tation for placing originals.
Original Orientation 29 3 Original Orientation To correctly display the top/bottom orientation of a scanned original on a client compute r, original orien tation must be set when placing th e original. When using the e-mail fu nction or the network deliver y scanner function, settings are made on the c ontrol pa nel of the machine .
Setting Originals 30 3 Scanning Originals in Several Times using the Exposure Glass A A A A Place the originals. Reference p.25 “ Pla cin g O rig ina ls ” Note ❒ Or ig inal s a re sca nn ed in o rde r. Place them from the first page. B B B B Make setti ngs for sca nning ar ea and original orien tation.
31 4. Sending Scan Files by E- mail Scan files ca n be sent from this machine to a specifi ed destination using e-mail. This chapter explains the preparation for sending scan files by e-mail, various display screens, procedures for sending, and how to check th e sending result when this function is us ed.
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 32 4 E-ma il Sc reen These screen s are shown when u sing the machine f or e-mail . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Main disp lay ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When a d estinat ion is s elected 1. E-mail icon ( ) Indicates tha t the E-mail scree n is dis- played.
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 33 4 Sending Scan Files by E-mail Procedu re for Sending by E- mail Scan fil es are sent after specif ying scan settin gs and destinations. A A A A Press the { { { { Scanner } } } } key. B B B B If the user codes are set, enter a user code usin g the nu mber ke ys, and th en pres s the { { { { # } } } } key.
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 34 4 Using a Quick Dial key to select a destinat ion A Press the Quick Di al key in which the d estination is regis- tered. Reference For more information about how to register the destina- tion, see General Setti ngs Guide .
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 35 4 D Select the destination u sing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 36 4 C Enter a 3-digit registration number that has been as signed to a destination using the number keys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. D Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. E To select more destinations, re- peat steps A A A A to D D D D .
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 37 4 Manual entry o f an e-mai l address A Press [ Manual ] . B Enter the e-mail address. Note ❒ It is possible to u se letters, numbers, and pe riods. The symbols ( ),;: ” cann ot be used. Reference For informat ion about how to enter characters, see Gen er- al Settings Guide .
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 38 4 H H H H Specify the e-mail send er. To speci fy a se nder, you can select it using the Quick Dial key, search for an d selec t it fr om the Des tina - tion List, or select it by specifying a registration number. A Press [ Options ] .
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 39 4 C For receivin g a return rec eipt confirmation , select [ On ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ A ccept ed ” message ap - pears, and then the Send O p- tions screen returns .
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 40 4 Note ❒ When a se nder's pass word is set, a screen f or entering the sender's password appear s. Enter the sender's password using the n umber ke ys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } or { { { { # } } } } key.
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 41 4 D Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ A ccept ed ” message ap - pears, and then th e Return Re- ceipt screen re turns. E For receivin g a return rec eipt confirmation , select [ On ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 42 4 D Press the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ A ccept ed ” message ap - pears, and then th e Return Re- ceipt screen re turns. E For receivin g a return rec eipt confor mation, select [ On ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 43 4 D Select the sender using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ When a se nder's pass word is set, a screen f or entering the sender's password appear s.
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 44 4 Man ual ent ry of a subjec t A Select [ Manual Input ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. B Enter a subject, an d then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ A ccept ed ” message ap - pears, and then the Send O p- tions screen returns .
Checking the Status of E-mail 45 4 Checking the S tatus of E-mail The status of the l ast 50 sendings can be checked. For every new sending record after 50, the oldest record is delete d. Important ❒ When the main power switch is turned off, all records are deleted.
Sending Scan Files by E-mail 46 4.
47 5. Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function Scan files can be se nt to a specified destination using the network delivery scan- ner function. Th is chapter explains the p reparation sequence, v arious display scre ens, deli very proc edures, and how to check t he deliver y result wh en this function is u sed.
Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 48 5 Network Deli very Scanner Scr een These scre ens are shown when using the mach ine as a network d elivery scanner. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Main disp lay ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When a d estinat ion is s elected 1. Network Deliv ery Scanner icon () Indicates that the Network Delivery Scann er screen i s displayed.
Preparation for Delivering 49 5 Note ❒ Press the { { { { Check Dest ination } } } } key t o check the select ed destinatio n. ❒ Gro up de stinat ions are d eno ted by this symbol ( ). 3. [] E-ma il/Network Delivery Scanne r Press to switch betw een the n etwork delivery scanner function and the e- mai l f unct ion.
Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 50 5 Delivering Scan Files Delivery Procedure Scan files are delivered after sc an set- tings and destinations are s pecified. If necessary , you c an sele ct a se nder an d a subject. A A A A Press the { { { { Scanner } } } } key.
Delivering Scan Files 51 5 Note ❒ When using Sc anRouter V2 Lite/Professional, the Destina- tion List is updated automati- cally. Using a Quick Dial key to select a destinat ion A Press the Quick Di al key in which the d estination is regis- tered.
Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 52 5 Reference For informat ion about how to enter characters, see Gen er- al Settings Guide . D Select the destination u sing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Delivering Scan Files 53 5 B Select [ Search by Registr ation No. ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. C Enter a 3-digit registration number that has been as signed to a destination using the number keys, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 54 5 D Select the destination u sing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Delivering Scan Files 55 5 G G G G Specify the sender (scan file de- liver source) if necessary. To speci fy a s ender, you c an search for an d selec t it fr om the Des tina - tion List, or select it by specifying a registration number. A Press [ Options ] .
Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 56 5 Searching to select a sender by name A Press t he { { { { Sea rch D est ina tion } } } } key. B Select [ Search by Name ] usi ng { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and t hen press th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Delivering Scan Files 57 5 When sel ecting a sender fr om Destination L ist A Press t he { { { { Sea rch D est ina tion } } } } key. B Select [ Display D estin atio n List ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 58 5 B Select [ Search by Registr ation No. ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. C Enter a 3-digit registration number that has been as signed to a sender using the number keys , and the n press the { { { { OK } } } } key twice.
Delivering Scan Files 59 5 Man ual ent ry of a subjec t A Select [ Manual Input ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. B Enter a subject, an d then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. The “ A ccept ed ” message ap - pears, and then the Send O p- tions screen returns .
Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function 60 5 Checking the S tatus of Deliver y The status of the last 50 deliveries can be ch ecked. For ev ery ne w deli very record after 50, the oldest record is delete d. Important ❒ When the main power switch is turned off, all records are deleted.
61 6. Using the Network TWAIN Scanner Function This chapter describes the operations for scanning originals with the network TWAIN scanner using DeskTopBinder V2 Lite. In addition, the preparation for using the network TWAIN sc anner and s ome functi ons of the TWAIN d river are introduced.
Using the Network TWAIN Scanner Function 62 6 Scanning Originals This section explains how t o scan originals usi ng the network TWAIN scanner function .
Scanning Originals 63 6 Note ❒ For advanced set tings, click [ Detail ] to display the Detail window. F or inform ation about the Detail window, see TWAIN drive r Help. C According to the settings of [ Document ] and [ Orientation: ] , change the other setting of the [ Document ] group.
Using the Network TWAIN Scanner Function 64 6 Functions of the TWAI N Driver The following is an introduction to the various functions of the TWAIN dri ver: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Automatic Tilt Correction This function automatically cor- rects charac ter strings that were scanned sla nted.
65 7. Appendix Relationship between Resolution and File Size Resolution and sca n area are inversely re lated. The higher the r esolution is set, the smaller the area that can be scanned. Converse ly, the larger the scan area, the lower the resolution that can be set.
Appendix 66 7 Max. Number of Addres ses Which Can Be Specified *1 Up to 50 addresses can be entered directly . All remaining addresses have to be spec- ified using the registered ones. *2 The maximum number of addresses which c an be specified va ries depending on the software you use, ScanRou ter V2 Lite or ScanRouter V2 Prof essional.
Troubleshooting 67 7 Troubleshooting This section contains advice on wha t to do if you have problems scann ing an origina l, or if the network deliver y scanner or e- mail functio n does not wo rk. Various messages that may appear on the control panel or cli ent computer are listed, along with causes and solutio ns.
Appendix 68 7 When an Error Messag e Appears on the Cont rol Panel Note ❒ If an error message that is not included in this section appears, turn off the main power switch of the machine, and then turn it on again.
Troubleshooting 69 7 Exceede d ma x.memo ry cap a. Sca nnin g will b e canc elled. Scan ned data wi ll be clea red. Because of insufficient memory space, the f irst page could not be scanned. Try one of the following measures: • Wait for a while, and then retry the scan opera tion.
Appendix 70 7 When an Error Messag e Appears on the Cli ent Computer This section describes the main possible c auses and actions for error messages displayed on the client c omputer when the TWAIN driver is used.
Troubleshooting 71 7 [ Error has occurred in the scanner driver. ] • Che ck wh ether th e netw ork cab le is con- necte d corre ctly to t he clien t comp uter. • Check whether the Ethernet board of the client computer is recognized cor- rectly by Windows .
Appendix 72 7 Specifications *1 Scanning speed s vary acco rding to machine operat ing conditi ons, computer (sp eci- fication, netwo rk traffic, and soft ware, etc.), and original types. Scan method Flatbed scanning Scan sp eed *1 • E-mail/Network Delivery Scanner Appro x.
73 INDEX A Auto Document Link , 22 Automatic T ilt Correction , 64 Auto Run prog ram , 16 C Checking th e status of delivery , 60 Checking th e status of e-mail , 45 Comp re ssi on , 14 Cont rol panel.
74 GB GB B683-8710 P Plac ing origi nals , 25 Auto Document Feed er (ADF) , 27 exposu re glass , 26 Preparatio n for delivering , 47 Prepa rati on fo r se ndin g by e -mail , 31 Previ ew , 63 Print&D el.
In accord ance wi th IEC 60 417, this machine uses the followi ng symb ols for the main po wer switc h: a a a a means POWE R ON. c c c c means STAND BY.
Operating Instructions Scanner Reference GB GB B683-8710.
Paper t ype: Wood Fre e 80g/m2, P aper Thickn ess=100 µ m // Pages in book=76 // Print scale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thick ness / 2 = 3.
Paper t ype: Wood Fre e 80g/m2, P aper Thickn ess=100 µ m // Pages in book=76 // Print scale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thick ness / 2 = 3.
i Manuals f or This M achine The following manuals describe the oper ational procedures of this ma chine. For particular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual. Note ❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine ty pe. ❒ Adobe Acr obat Reader is nec essary to view t he manuals as a PDF file.
ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBind er V2 Lite Desk Top Binde r V2 L ite is a ut ilit y incl uded on th e CD- ROM l abe led “ Scanner Driv er & Docu men t Mana geme nt Ut ilit ies ” .
iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machin e ...... ..... ........ ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ . i How to Read Thi s Manual . ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ........ ..... ........ ..... .....
iv Searchi ng for a Desti nation ........... ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ...... ....... ...... ........ ... 32 Search by Destinati on Name .. ...... .......... ....... .......... ....... .......... .......... ....... .......... .... 32 Selecting fr om Destination List.
1 How to Read This Manual Sym bol s In th is manual, the following sym bols are used: R WARNING: This symbol ind icates a potentially hazardous situation that migh t result in death or serious i njury when you misuse the mac hine without following t he in- structi ons under t his symbo l.
2 Stell aC2-GBc ombi ne-F_FM_ ZF.book Page 2 Wedn esday, November 26, 20 03 5:0 4 PM.
3 1. Getting Started Control Panel The illustrati on shows the control panel when options are installed. 1. Communicating indicator Lights during tran smission or reception. 2. Receive File indicator Lights to t ell you a message h as been re- ce ived in to me mor y.
Getting Sta rted 4 1 12. { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key Use to chang e default or ope ration pa- rameters accord ing to the operating con- dit ion s. 13. { { { { Clear Modes } } } } key Press to clear the current setti ng. 14. { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key Clear: Clears an entered numeric value.
Control Panel 5 1 Reading t he Display The display shows you th e machine status, messages, and guides you thr ough oper atio ns. Note ❒ This machine automat ically retu rns to s tandby m ode if you do not use th e machine for a certai n period of time.
Getting Sta rted 6 1 1. Machine stat us or currently se- lected function 2. Message 3. Destinati on entry 4. Selection keys 5. Selectable items ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When Internet Fax Settings is ON 1. Switches the destination be- tween fax number and e-mai l ad- dres s.
Control Panel 7 1 Com munic atio n displ ay While co mmunicating, the machine st atus is displ ayed. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Memory Transmission (fax transmission) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Reception ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Immediate Transmission ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ TX Mode When a funct ion is set to on, a “ clip ” mark is atta ched to th at functi on name .
Getting Sta rted 8 1 User code entry display When the following message a ppears on the disp lay, User Code Management is active . Enter a user cod e to de activate Use r Code Management. The mach ine can be set up so that no one can use it without e ntering a user code.
9 2. Faxing Transmiss ion Modes There are two types of transmission: • Memory Transmission • Immediate Transmission Note ❒ You can use Parallel M emory T ra n s- mission that dials while the origi- nal is being sc anned. See p.28 “ Parall el Mem ory Tran smissi on ” , Facsimile Reference <Advanced Fea- tures> .
Faxing 10 2 Importa nt ❒ If power outage lasts about an hour, or t he machine is discon- nected from the power outlet for abou t an hour, docu ments stored in t he fax machine's memory ar e deleted. If any doc - ument is d eleted, the Power Failure Rep ort is automatically printed out when the main powe r swit ch is t urned on.
Placin g Originals 11 2 Placing Or iginals You can set your orig inals either in the Docu ment Feeder o r on the expo- sure glass. Some types of original s are unsuitable for the Document Feeder so they must be set on the exposure glass.
Faxing 12 2 ❒ Make sure that all ink, correcting fluid etc ., has compl etely dri ed be- fore placing your ori ginal. If it is still we t, the ex posure glass will be marked and tho se marks will ap- pear o n the r eceiv ed imag e. ❒ You can send the first pages from the exposure gl ass then the re- mainin g page s from t he ADF.
Placin g Originals 13 2 ❒ You c an ch ec k in form ati on a bout the sizes and number of originals t ha t c an be pl ac e d i n t h e A D F . S e e p.102 “ Acceptable Types of Origi- nals ” , F acsimile Reference <Ad- vanced F eatures> . A A A A Adjust the d ocument guide to match the size of the or iginals.
Faxing 14 2 Memory Tr ansmission In Memory Transmission mode, af ter you press the { { { { Start } } } } key, the machine does not dial t he d estin atio n unti l all pages of your fax message have been scanned into memory (in contrast to Immed iat e Tra nsmi ssio n, wh ere t he num ber is dialed first and p ages are scanned and sent one by one).
Memory Trans mission 15 2 B B B B Place the original in the ADF, or on the exposure glass. Note ❒ You can send the first few pages from the exposure glass then the remaining pages from the ADF. After you remo ve the last page from the exposure glass , you have 60 seconds to insert the remaining pa ges in the ADF.
Faxing 16 2 ❒ Entered destinations can be checke d using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } . ❒ To delete a n entered des tina- tion, find it using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , press the { { { { Clear/Sto p } } } } key, and then press [ Delete ] .
Cancelin g a Memory Transmis sion 17 2 Canceling a Me mory Transmissi on Even when fa x numb er and e -mail address are simultaneously speci fied, or on ly e-m ail addre ss is s pec ified, you can cancel the mode us ing th e s a m e p r o c e d u r e .
Faxing 18 2 A A A A Make sure that the standby dis- play appear s. Note ❒ If you press the { { { { Clear/S top } } } } key while the original is bei ng scanned , scanning stops. B B B B Pre ss th e { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key. C C C C Pre ss [ St op TX ] .
Immediate Tr ansmission 19 2 Immediate Trans mission With Imme diate Transmission, when you pres s the { { { { Start } } } } key, th e fax number is dialed immediately. The message is scanned and transmitted page by page without bein g stored in memor y.
Faxing 20 2 Referen ce p.11 “ Placing Origi nals ” . C C C C Select t he scan se ttings yo u re- quir e. Referen ce p.23 “ Scan S ettings ” p.24 “ Origina l Type ” p.
Immediate Tr ansmission 21 2 - - - - Sendi ng orig inals using t he exposure gla ss A Mak e sur e the Memor y Tra ns. in- dicator is off. I f it is n ot, press t he { { { { Memory Trans. } } } } key. B Place the first page face dow n on the exposure gl ass.
Faxing 22 2 Canceling an Imme diate Transmis sion Before Yo u Have Press ed { { { { Start } } } } Key A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { Clear Modes } } } } key. Note ❒ When the or iginal is placed in the ADF, you can also cancel an Immediate Tr ansmission by re- moving the original.
Scan Sett ings 23 2 Scan Settings You may wa nt to send many different types of fax messages. Som e of these may be difficu lt to repr oduce at the receiver's end. However, your ma- chine has three settin gs that you can adjust to help you tran smit your doc- ument with the best po ssible image quality .
Faxing 24 2 A A A A Press the { { { { Res olutio n } } } } key to switch between resolutions. The indica- tors above the key shows the cur- rent sele ction.
Scan Sett ings 25 2 Image Density (Contrast) The t ext an d dia gram s in your o rigi - nal sh ould stan d out clearly fro m the paper they are written on. I f your original has a darker background than normal (for example, a news pa- per cli pping), or i f the wr iting is faint , adjust the image density.
Faxing 26 2 When placing originals i n the ADF Note ❒ Depending on what time the scan settings are adjust ed, the settings may no t be ref lected i n the r esult- ing operation. A A A A Check w hich pag es you wan t to scan with d ifferent settings.
Specifying a Des tination 27 2 Specifying a De stination Yo u can spec ify th e dest inati on usin g one of three method s. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Fax number p.27 “ Entering a Fax Number ” ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ E-mail address p.29 “ E ntering an E-mail Ad dress ” ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Destination list p.
Faxing 28 2 Paus e Press the { { { { Pause/Redia l } } } } key when di- aling or storing a number to insert a paus e of about two seco nds. Note ❒ You cannot i nsert a p ause befor e the first digit of a fax number. If you pres s the { { { { Pause/ Redial } } } } key at the first digit, a redial occurs.
Specifying a Des tination 29 2 Entering an E-mail Address When using In ternet Fax transmis- sion, specify the e-mail address in place of the fax number. Note ❒ You can enter up to 128 cha racters. A A A A Make sure that is displayed in the destination d isplay column.
Faxing 30 2 Limitatio n ❒ Group Dial can be used for Memory Transmis sion only; not Immed iate Transmissio n. If you sp ecify Imme- diate Transmission in Group Dial, the " Try again after switching to memo ry tr ansmiss ion. " mes- sage appears.
Specifying a Des tination 31 2 Note ❒ If you make a m istake, press the { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key and tr y again. ❒ If you wan t to specify other des- tinations, press [ Add Dest ] .
Faxing 32 2 Searching for a De stination Use t his procedu re to search th rough the destinat ion lists for a particular destinat ion. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Search by Destination Name p.32 “ Search by Destin ation Name ” ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Select by Display Destination List p.
Searching f or a Destination 33 2 F F F F Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. A search progres s starts, then search re sult appe ars. Note ❒ If no destination is matched for specified text, " Specified des- tination is no t programmed. " is dis played .
Faxing 34 2 F F F F Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. The speci fied de stinatio n is sele ct- ed. Note ❒ Press [ Add Dest ] to specify other destinations . ❒ You ca nnot sp ecif y des ti nati ons twice. If you t ry to, th e “ This destinat ion has already be en programm ed.
Searching f or a Destination 35 2 Searc h by Fax Number Note ❒ The search returns only destina- tions whos e beginnings match the entered fax num ber. A A A A Pre ss [] to display . B B B B Pre ss th e { { { { Search D estination } } } } key. C C C C Sele ct [ Sea rch by Fax No.
Faxing 36 2 H H H H Select the number to specify us- ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } . I I I I Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. The destination which you searched is specified. Note ❒ Press [ Add Dest ] to specify other destinations .
Searching f or a Destination 37 2 G G G G Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. Search result appe ars. Note ❒ If no dest ination is m atched for speci fied e-mail addr ess, " Spec- ified dest ination is not p ro- gramme d. " is disp layed. Press [ Exit ] to retur n to the display of C .
Faxing 38 2 Recepti on There are two ways you can set up your mach ine to ha ndle in coming calls: • Manual Reception (external tele- phone req uired) • Auto R ecept ion ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Auto Switch In this mod e, the machine ri ngs a number of times.
Recepti on 39 2 B B B B Select the recep tion mode using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , an d then press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. The standby display appears. Note ❒ To cancel the select ion, press the { { { { Cancel } } } } key.
Faxing 40 2 Stel laC2-GBc ombi ne-F_FM_ ZF.book Page 4 0 Wed nesday , Novembe r 26, 2 003 5 :04 PM.
41 3. Using Internet Fax Functions Internet Fax Functions The optional printer/sca nner unit is required. This machine co nverts sca nned do cument im ages t o e-mail for mat and tr ansmi ts the da ta over the Inter net. The e-mail se nt by this machine can be recei ved by another Internet Fax ma- chine.
Using Inter net Fax Funct ions 42 3 Interne t Fax Precautions • Internet F ax communic ates with a server over a LAN. I t cannot co mmunicate direc tly wit h other part ies. • If a transmission is not successfu l, this machine usually receives a n e-mail er- ror noti fication .
Internet Fax Functio ns 43 3 T.37 Full Mode This machine is T.37 full mode compatib le. T.37 full mode is an international standard for Internet Fax transmission. (ITU-T announcement, RFC2532) When an I ntern et Fax c ommunica t io n is made betwee n T.
Using Inter net Fax Funct ions 44 3 Note ❒ If the receiver is progr ammed as the simple mode mac hine or not pro- grammed in the Add ress Book , the r eceive r's rece ption ca pabili ty cannot be registered. ❒ If you know the receiver's reception capability, you can set it manually.
Tran smitti ng Inte rnet Fa x 45 3 Transmitting Internet Fax Prep arat ion You need to make System Settings beforeha nd. See “ Setting Up the Machine on a Netw ork ” , Net wo rk Guide . This section de scribe s how to scan a docum ent into the memo ry and send it as e-mail.
Using Inter net Fax Funct ions 46 3 ❒ You can l imit the si ze of transm it- ted e-mail messages. See p.68 “ E- mail Setti ngs ” , Fac simile R eference <Advanced Feat ures> . ❒ See p.54 “ Received Im ages ” for how e -ma il is a ctua lly r eceiv ed by the com puter wh en it is sent with mail op tions se lected.
Tran smitti ng Inte rnet Fa x 47 3 D Press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. The di splay return s to th at of step A . Note ❒ If you press the { { { { Cancel } } } } key, entering a subject is c anceled.
Using Inter net Fax Funct ions 48 3 ❒ The ori ginal can be pl aced ei- ther in the A DF or on the expo - sure gla ss, unti l the { { { { Start } } } } key is pressed. Referen ce p.11 “ Placing Origi nals ” . F F F F Selec t the sc an se ttings y ou requ ire.
Tran smitti ng Inte rnet Fa x 49 3 J J J J Pre ss th e { { { { Start } } } } key. This machin e starts scanning the document i nto memory. T he e- mail send operatio n starts after the scanning operation is complete. When scanning is complete, the Communicating indicator lights and transmiss ion starts.
Using Inter net Fax Funct ions 50 3 Confirming Rec eption When Return Rec eipt is set under “ E- mai l O pti ons ” , the receiver sends back a return recei pt mes sage .
Canceli ng Interne t Fax Transmissi on 51 3 Canceling Inte rnet Fax Transm ission When fax and Inte rnet Fax d estina - tions are specified s imultaneously, you can c ancel sending using the same me th od. Note ❒ You cannot cancel a transmission once scanni ng is compl ete.
Using Inter net Fax Funct ions 52 3 Receiv ing Internet Fax You ca n receiv e e-mail docu ments by Inte rnet Fax . There are two meth ods of receiving e- mail: Au to E-mail Reception and Ma nual E-ma il Re cept ion. Limitatio n ❒ E-m ail wi th attac hmen ts othe r than TIFF-F format files cannot be re- ceived.
Receivin g Inter net Fax 53 3 B B B B Pre ss th e { { { { Start } } } } key. Accesses the server to chec k for e- mail. E-mail is in the server A Start printing and receiving in the memory. If the receiving is finished, the stand by display appears. E-mail is not in the server A Press [ Exit ] .
Using Inter net Fax Funct ions 54 3 Received Image s Here is an example of an Internet Fax m essage sent from this machine and re- ceived on a com puter using Outlook e-mail softw are. The re ceiv ed im age va rie s ac cordi ng to e-mai l sof twa re. 1.
55 4. Programming Initial Setti ngs and Adjustments You can send i nformation to the ot her party wh en tran smit ting or receivi ng a fax message . Thi s infor mation is show n on the disp lay of the other ma - chine and pri nted as a rep ort. The fol- lowing information can be sent.
Programming 56 4 Programming A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. B B B B Sele ct [ Fax Fe atures ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
Initia l Settin gs and Adjustm ents 57 4 Refe rence "Entering Text", General Set- tings Guide. Programming an Own F ax Number A Select [ Own Fax Numbe r ] usin g { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Programming 58 4 E E E E Sele ct [ Fax Head er ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. F F F F Pre ss th e { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key. All c haracte rs a re dele ted. G G G G Enter the char acters you want to program, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key .
Initia l Settin gs and Adjustm ents 59 4 E E E E Sele ct [ Fax Head er ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press t he { { { { OK } } } } key. F F F F Pre ss th e { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key. All registered ch aracters are delet- ed.
Programming 60 4 Programming Fax Numbers and E-mail addres ses You can program fax destinations using Address Boo k Management in the Key Operator Too ls menu under System Settings. You can also register the programmed fax nu mbers and e-mail addresses in a Grou p.
61 5. Troubleshooting Adjusting the Volume You ca n chan ge t he vol ume of the fol- lowing sounds that the machine make s. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ On Hook Mode Heard when the { { { { On Hook Dial } } } } key is pressed. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ At Transmissi on Heard when the machi ne sends a message.
Troublesh ooting 62 5 G G G G You can adj ust the volume using { { { {W W W W} } } } or { { { {V V V V} } } } . Note ❒ You ca n adjust the vo lume b y seven levels. H H H H Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ Press the { { { { Cancel } } } } key to canc el setting and the display returns to that of step E .
When { Facsim ile } Key Is Lit in Red 63 5 When { { { { Facsimile } } } } Key Is Lit in Red If thi s key is lit, press the key to enter t he facsimi le mode. Then, re fer to th e table below and take the appropr iate action. Problem S olutions A facsimile error has occurred.
Troublesh ooting 64 5 When Toner Runs Out When the machi ne has run out of ton- er, t he sy mbol app ears on t he di spl ay. Note that even if there is no toner left, you can still send fax messages.
Error Mess ages and Their Mean ings 65 5 Error Mes sages and Thei r Meanings If there is an error, one of the following me ssages may appear on the display. If other message appears, follow the message. Messa ge Causes a nd solutio ns Put orig inal back, ch eck it and pres s Star t key.
Troublesh ooting 66 5 Chec k whet her ther e are any netw ork pr oblems . [14-09] E-mail transmission wa s refused by SMTP au- thentication or POP before SMTP aut hentica- tion.
Error Mess ages and Their Mean ings 67 5 - - - - Out of pa per display message If the paper tray runs out of paper, “ Out of paper. Load it, then press [Ex- it].
Troublesh ooting 68 5 Solving P roblems This table lists some common problems and their solutions. Problem Causes and so lutions Reference Image background appears dirty when recei ved at the oth er en d. Im ages from the back page appear. Adjust scan densit y.
Solving Probl ems 69 5 When using On Hook Dial or Manual Dial, " Receiving " appears and tran smission is not al lowed. If the mac hine fails to detect the size of the original when the { { { { Start } } } } key is pressed, it performs a receivi ng opera- tion.
Troublesh ooting 70 5 When Things D on't Go as Expect ed I Want... Operation Reference to cancel a Mem ory Transmis- sio n. If the origi nal is be ing scanned, pr ess the { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key.
71 INDEX A Adju stin g the Volu me , 61 At Dialing , 61 At Pr inting , 61 At Recept ion , 61 At Transmission , 61 On Hook Mode , 61 Attach Subject , 45 Aut hor ized Rec ept ion , 42 Auto E-ma il Recep.
72 GB GB B168-86 00 Q Quick Dial Specifying a d estination , 30 Specifying a group of destinations , 30 R Received Image s , 54 Reception , 38 Auto Recepti on , 38 Manua l Rece ption , 38 Registration Number , 34 Resolution , 23 Return Receipt , 45 RTI->Own Name , 55 S Scan Se ttings , 23 Standard , 23 Switchin g the Reception Mode , 38 T T.
Paper t ype: Wood Fre e 80g/m2, P aper Thickn ess=100 µ m // Pages in book=76 // Print scale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thick ness / 2 = 3.
Paper t ype: Wood Fre e 80g/m2, P aper Thickn ess=100 µ m // Pages in book=76 // Print scale=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thick ness / 2 = 3.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book= 112 // P rint scal e=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thick ness / 2 = 4.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book= 112 // P rint scal e=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thick ness / 2 = 4.480000 mm Intr oduc tio n This man ual des cribes d etaile d instr uctions on the operat ion and notes about t he use of th is machi ne.
i Manuals f or This M achine The following manuals describe the oper ational procedures of this ma chine. For particular functions, see the relevant parts of the manual. Note ❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine ty pe. ❒ Adobe Acr obat Reader is nec essary to view t he manuals as a PDF file.
ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBind er V2 Lite Desk Top Binde r V2 L ite is a ut ilit y incl uded on th e CD- ROM l abe led “ Scanner Driv er & Docu men t Mana geme nt Ut ilit ies ” .
iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machin e ...... ..... ........ ...... ....... ...... ....... ...... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ . i How to Read Thi s Manual . ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ........ ..... ........ ..... .....
iv Printed R eport ....... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ ..... ........ . 31 Memory Storage Repor t ...... .......... ....... .......... ....... .......... ....... .......... ...... ......
v LAN-Fax Operation Messages ... .......... ....... .......... ....... .......... ...... .......... .......... ....... . 57 LAN-Fax Error Report ...... .......... ....... .......... .......... ....... .......... ...... .......... ....... .......... . 57 LAN-Fax Result by E-mail .
vi 9. Appendix Connect ing the Machine to a Telephone Line and Telep hone ... ......... ............ 99 Connecting the Telephone Line ........ ...... ........... ...... .......... .......... ....... .......... ....... .... 99 Selecting the Line Type..
1 How to Read This Manual Sym bol s In th is manual, the following sym bols are used: R WARNING: This symbol ind icates a potentially hazardous situation that migh t result in death or serious i njury when you misuse the mac hine without following t he in- structi ons under t his symbo l.
2 Names of Major Options The followi ng software products are r eferred to using a general name : • DeskTopBinder V2 Lite and DeskTop Binder V2 Professional → DeskTop- Binder V2 Lite /Professional Stell aC2-AEc ombine -F_FM.
3 1. Transmission Mode Sending at a Speci fic Time (Send Later) Usin g this funct ion, yo u can ins truct the m achin e to dela y tran smiss ion of your fax message until a spec ified la t- er time. This allows you to take ad- va ntage of off -peak t elep hone charges without having to be by th e machi ne at the time.
Transmissi on Mode 4 1 Note ❒ To can cel the setting, select [ Off ] , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key. The display re turns to that of step C . E E E E Enter the time using the number keys, and then press (24 hr for- mat). Note ❒ If you enter a wrong numbe r, press the { { { { Clear/Sto p } } } } key, and then reenter .
User Tr ansmission 5 1 User T ransmi ssion This functio n allow s you to check each us er o r de part ment 's tra nsmis - sion history. To use the function, you need to program a user code (eight digits max.) for ea ch user or depart- m ent, to b e en tere d be for e tr ans mis - sion.
Transmissi on Mode 6 1 ❒ When canceling transmission by use r code, to de lete the pro- grammed user code, press the { { { { Clear/S top } } } } key, and then the { { { { OK } } } } key. E E E E Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. The dis play ret urns to that of step C .
E-mail Opti ons 7 1 E-mail Options When using the Internet Fax function, you can make the following settings: • Attach Subje ct You can enter a subjec t for the e- mail you want to send. Note ❒ For convenience, program fre- quen tly used subjec ts.
Transmissi on Mode 8 1 Fax Header Print In some cases, you may want the oth- er party to rec eive an unmarked copy of your origi nal. To do this, switch Fax Header off. When the Fax Header is set t o “ On ” , the stor ed name is printed o n the re- ceiver 's p aper .
Label I nsert ion 9 1 Label Inse rtio n With this function you can have the receiver name printed on the m essage when it is received at the other end. The name wi ll be print ed at the to p of the page and will be preceded by “ To: ” . Note ❒ When ther e is an image around the area where the Label is t o be print- ed, that image is deleted.
Transmissi on Mode 10 1 Stell aC2-AEco mbine -F_FM.b ook Page 10 Tu esday, Ja nuary 13, 2004 1:22 PM.
11 2. Communication Information After you have pressed the { { { { Start } } } } key (after scanning originals), you can chec k and edit the dest ination or setti ngs of Memory Transmiss ion. You c an also c an- cel a transmission, print a stored file and print a list of stored files.
Communicati on Informat ion 12 2 D D D D Pre ss [ Dele te ] . The selected file is deleted. The displ ay re turns to that of ste p B . Note ❒ To quit transmission cancel, press [ No ] . ❒ To cancel another transmission, repe at fro m ste p B . E E E E Pre ss th e { { { { Cancel } } } } key.
Printi ng a List of Fil es in Memory (Pr int TX Standby File List) 13 2 Printing a Li st of Files in Memo ry (Print TX Standby File List) Print this list if you want to fi nd out which fi les are st ored in memory and what their file numb ers are. Knowing the file num ber can be useful (for ex- ample when er asing files).
Communicati on Informat ion 14 2 Checking the Transmission Re sult (TX File Status) You can browse a par t of the Trans- mission Result Repo rt on the di splay. Note ❒ Only the transmission result of the last 100 commun ications (recep- tions & transmissio ns) are shown.
Checking th e Reception Res ult (RX File Stat us) 15 2 Check ing the Recepti on Result (RX Fi le Status) You can browse a part of the Recep- tion R esul t Report on the displ ay. Note ❒ Only the re ception result of th e last 100 communic ations (receptio ns & transmissions) are shown.
Communicati on Informat ion 16 2 Printing a File (Print TX Standby File) If you want to c heck the content s of a file that is s tored in memor y and not yet sen t, use thi s procedur e to print it out. Note ❒ You can also pr int files t hat have not been successfully transmitted.
Printing a F ile Received with Memory Lock (Pri nt Memory Lock File ) 17 2 Printing a Fil e Receive d with Memory Loc k (Print Memory L ock File) This i s a secu rity func tion designed to preve nt un aut hori zed us ers from reading your m essages.
Communicati on Informat ion 18 2 D D D D Enter a 4-digit M emory Lock ID usin g the numb er key s, and the n pre ss th e { { { { Start } } } } key. The dis play ret urns to that of step C . Note ❒ If the Me mory Lock ID does not match, the mes sage " Sp ecifi ed code does not match the progra mme d Memory Lock ID.
Printi ng the Journa l 19 2 Printing the Journal The Journal contains information about the last 50 communica tions (maximum) made by your machine. It is print ed auto matica lly after every 50 communicat ions (reception s & trans- miss ion s). You ca n also prin t a copy of th e Jour- nal at any time by follow ing the pro- cedure b elow.
Communicati on Informat ion 20 2 Journal 1. Printing date Shows the d ate and time when the report is printed. 2. Programme d sender name Shows the sender name program med for printin g. 3. Date Shows the transmis sion or receptio n dat e. 4. Time Shows the tr ansmis sion or rece ptio n start time .
Printi ng the Journa l 21 2 6. Communication mode • For fax transmissions and receptions Aft er “ T ” for outgoing fax or “ R ” for ingoing fax, s hows a comm unication mode .
Communicati on Informat ion 22 2 E-mail Rece ptio n You can rece ive Inter net Fax do cu- ments ma nually using the { { { { Job I nfor - mation } } } } key. Newly-arrived e-mail is printed out when received manu ally. Note ❒ E-ma il can als o be rece ived ma nu- ally using the User Function keys.
23 3. Other Transmission Features Handy Dialing Functions Chain Dial This allows you to compose a tel e- phone number from various parts, some of which may be store d in Quick Dials and some of which may be entered usin g the number keys. Note ❒ Maximum length o f a telephone or fax number: 128 digits.
Other Transmi ssion Feat ures 24 3 Redial The ma chine stores the las t 10 desti- nati ons spec if ied. If yo u wa nt t o sen d a message to a destination which you sent faxes to recently, the Redial f unc- tion saves you t ime by finding and entering the destination again.
On Hook Dial 25 3 On Hook Dial The On Hook Dial functio n allows you to dial w hile hearing tone from the internal speaker. You can send a fax checking the connection. Note ❒ This fun ctio n is un avai labl e in some countries. A A A A Place the original, and then select the scan settings you require.
Other Transmi ssion Feat ures 26 3 Manual Dial The externa l telephone is r equired. Pick up the handset of the external telephone and dial. When the lin e is connected and you hear a high- pitched to ne, press the { { { { Star t } } } } key to send your fax message.
Transmiss ion Features 27 3 Transmiss ion Features Detecting Bl ank Sheet Upon c ompl eti on of t he fi rst pa ge scanning, an alarm sounds if t he page is nearly blank. When this happens, a message appe ars for a fe w seconds. The message dif fers depending on number of page s to be scanned and transmission mode.
Other Transmi ssion Feat ures 28 3 More Transmission Functions If M emory R uns Out While Storing an Origin al If memory runs out while storing or sending an original (free space reach- es 0%), one of the following m essages appears. Press [ Exit ] to tr ansmit stored pages only.
More Tran smission Functio ns 29 3 Checking the Tra nsmission Result • Turn the Transmission Result Re- port on if you want a report to be print ed after every success ful transmissio n. See p.31 “ Transmis- sion Result Report (Memory Transmission) ” .
Other Transmi ssion Feat ures 30 3 Note ❒ Note that during Immediate Tr ans- mission or wh en in Us er Tools mode, the machine cannot scan an original. JBIG Tran smission If you us e JB IG (Joi nt Bi- lev el Ima ge Expe rts G roup) c ompre ssio n, you can send photogra phic originals faster than w ith ot her m ethod s of co mpres- sion.
Printed Report 31 3 Printed Report Memory Storage Report Thi s repor t is pr inted af ter an origin al is stored in memo ry. It he lps you re- view the contents and th e destina- tions of stored original s. Limitatio n ❒ If you use Parall el Memory Trans- miss ion , t he Memo ry S tor age R e- port is not printed .
Other Transmi ssion Feat ures 32 3 Communication Failure Rep ort This repo rt is pri nted when a message coul d not be su ccessful ly tran smitted with Memory Transmission. If the machine is set up to print a Transmis sion Result Report, t his re- port is not printed.
33 4. Reception Features Recepti on Imme diate Recepti on Each page of a f ax me ssag e is print ed as soon as it is received. This method is used for standard fax messages.
Rec ept ion Feat ure s 34 4 Important ❒ When abou t one h our p ass es af ter power of the m achine is tu rned off, all fax messages stored in memory will be lost. If an y message s have been lost for t his r eason , a Pow er Failu re Repor t is automa tically printe d when the op eration switch is turned on.
Recepti on 35 4 Receiving mes sages uncondi tionally If one of th e conditions listed belo w occurs, t he machine receives all fax messag- es using Subs titute Recep tion.
Rec ept ion Feat ure s 36 4 Reception Functions Forwar ding Received Docume nts This machin e can forward received docume nts to other destinations pro- grammed in memory based on Own Name, Own Fax Number or sender 's e-mail address.
Reception Fu nctions 37 4 SMTP Reception Using Inter net Fax You can se t SMTP r eception with this machin e. W i t h S M T P r e c e p t i o n , e - m a i l i s r e c e iv e d a s s o o n a s i t i s s e n t t o t h e e - m a i l a d d r e s s set by the machine.
Rec ept ion Feat ure s 38 4 Routing E-mail Received via SMTP E-mail received via SM TP can be routed to other fax machines. It can also be routed to destinat ions progra mmed as Quick Dial entrie s or Groups. Prep arat ion Before routi ng e-mail received via SMTP, you first must set "SMTP RX File Delivery Settings" to "On".
Reception Fu nctions 39 4 - - - - Specif ying E- mail Tra nsfer The originator can request tr ansfer of e-mail sent to another fax machine by spec- ifying the e-m ail address as follows: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Fax Number fax=destination fax number@ host name of this machine.
Rec ept ion Feat ure s 40 4 Printing Options Print Completi on Beep When this f unction is turned on, the machine be eps to let you k now when a received message has been printed. Note ❒ You can a lter the volume of the beep or turn it off completely (set the v olum e to th e min imum l evel ).
Prin ting O ption s 41 4 Reception Time You can have th e da te and time pri nt- ed at the bottom o f the messa ge when it is re ceived . You c an tur n this f unc- tion on or off using Reception Set- tings.
Rec ept ion Feat ure s 42 4 Page Separation and Length Reduction When the size of a received message is longe r than the paper l oaded in t he machine, eac h page of the message can be split and pr inted on seve ral sheets, or reduced and pri nted on a single sheet.
Prin ting O ption s 43 4 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Priori ty Table • KK and LL indic ate that the message is split o ver two pages of paper wi th the orie ntatio n and size shown. Paper sele ct priority may differ if no page separation threshold is set. Note ❒ Widths that th is machine c an re- ceive are A 4, B4 J IS, and A3.
Rec ept ion Feat ure s 44 4 Just size printing Received do cuments are pr inted on the paper tha t has first prio rity (see p.43 “ Priorit y Tab le ” ). Th is fun ction is set using "Use r Parameters"(s witch 05,bit 05). T he default is Off .
45 5. Using Fax with Computers Sendin g Fax Document s from Comput ers The optional printer/sca nner unit is required. Using com puters connected to th e machine through para llel ports, IEEE 1394 (IP Over 1394) ports, LANs, or wireless LANs, you can fax documents, created us- ing Windo ws applications, to ot her fax machines over a telephone line.
Using Fax with Co mputers 46 5 Before Use To use these features, a LAN-Fax Driver must be installed on your computer. Use the L AN -Fax driver i ncluded on th e printer CD-ROM. You must also mak e the re quired com puter to fax networ k settings on the machine, accor ding to the type o f conn ec tio n.
Sending Fax Doc uments from Comput ers 47 5 ❒ Auto Run might not work auto- maticall y with certai n OS settings . If this is the case, doubl e-click “ Set - up.
Using Fax with Co mputers 48 5 Applications Stored on the CD-ROM This sect ion provide s informati on about LAN-Fax D river, Address Book, and L AN-Fax Cove r She et Ed i- tor.
Sending Fax Doc uments from Comput ers 49 5 When this mach ine is con nected to a network, selection s for the option configuration ar e automatically per- formed. For details, see Help. Note ❒ If the opti ons on this m achine are not configured as i nstructed, LAN- Fax functi ons may fai l to work as intende d.
Using Fax with Co mputers 50 5 B B B B Sele ct [ LAN-Fax M5 ] in [ Pri nter Name ] . C C C C Click [ OK ] . The LAN-Fax dialog box appears. Note ❒ The setti ng method may d iffer depending on the applicatio n you are using. In a ll cases, select [ LAN-Fax M5 ] for the prin ter.
Sending Fax Doc uments from Comput ers 51 5 B In the [ Name: ] list s elect [ Con- tact ] , [ Company ] , or [ Group ] , an d then sel ect [ All ] or an initial let- ter. The destinations matching the select ed paramet ers appear. C Clic k t he de sti nat ion to hig h- light it, and then cl ick [ Set as Dest ina tion ] .
Using Fax with Co mputers 52 5 Spec ifyin g optio ns You can specify the following op- tion s: For details, see Help. • Sending at S pecific Time • User Code • User ID • Print Fax Header A A A A Click [ Option. .. ] . B B B B Specify options you want to use.
Sending Fax Doc uments from Comput ers 53 5 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Web B rowse r • ID • User ID • Status • Page(s) • Starte d At • Document No. Referenc e For det ails, see Help. Printing and Saving You can print documen ts created us- ing Windows applications.
Using Fax with Co mputers 54 5 G Enter a file nam e. Note ❒ You can also change the fold- er in this step. H Click [ Save ] . The image file is saved in the specifie d folder. Editing Addr ess Book You can progr am an d edi t dest ina- tions in the address list using the Ad - dres s B ook.
Sending Fax Doc uments from Comput ers 55 5 Note ❒ The co nfi rmati on d ialog box does not app ear when you have not made any changes aft er starting Address Book.
Using Fax with Co mputers 56 5 Note ❒ Cover sheet d ata is stored in its own for mat (u sing "fcp " as i ts ex- tension) A A A A On the [ St art ] menu, poi nt to [ Pro- grams ] , [ LAN-Fax Utilities ] , an d then click [ LAN-Fa x Cover Sheet Editor ] .
Sending Fax Doc uments from Comput ers 57 5 LAN-Fax Operati on Messages Note ❒ You ca n have the LAN-Fa x Erro r Repor t prin ted when op tion s are not p rop- erly sele cted, or there is a communication er ror with a computer. See p. 76 “ User Para meters ” (swit ch 20, bit 0).
Using Fax with Co mputers 58 5 Editing Rec eiver's Fax Information Via Web Browse r When the r eceiv er being pro- gram med or added t o the a ddress book i s a T.37 full m ode compa tible type wit h the Interne t Fa x funct ion, you can set the follo wing receiv er's fax infor mat ion u sin g a W eb br owser .
Editing Receiver's Fax Informat ion Via Web Browse r 59 5 B Under [ In ternet Fax Data F ormat ] , set the items of fax information to meet the receiver 's specifica- tions, excep t for [ Select mode ] . Note ❒ If [ Simple mode ] is select ed, the fax information cannot be set.
Using Fax with Co mputers 60 5 Stell aC2-AEco mbine -F_FM.b ook Page 60 Tu esday, Ja nuary 13, 2004 1:22 PM.
61 6. Facsimile Features Function List The User Tool s allow you to program you r identification, store frequentl y used number s and settings, an d customize d efault settings to m eet your needs. The User Tools are grouped by functions so that you can quickly and easily fi nd the de sire d User To ol.
Facsimil e Features 62 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ E-mail Setting s ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Key Operator Tool s - - - - Displa ys • Press the { { { { User To ols/Counter } } } } key to enter User Tools menu. • You can switch the display using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } .
Func tio n List 63 6 - - - - Key Operator Code When Key Op erator Code is p rogrammed and turned on, u sers have to enter a progr ammed Ke y Opera tor C ode ( eight digit s max imum) t o oper ate the Us er Tools. This prevents unauthorized peop le from changing settings.
Facsimil e Features 64 6 Accessi ng User Tools ( Facsimi le Feature s) Customize the fac simile settings ac- cording to the operations to be fre- quentl y perfor med. Note ❒ Cus tomized facs imile defau lts are kept until the defaults are changed again.
Accessing User Tools (F acsimile Featu res) 65 6 E E E E Follow the displayed instructions to chang e the default, and then pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. Depending on the menu, y ou may need t o rep eat st ep E . When yo u have sele cted th e pri nt menu, press the { { { { Start } } } } key to print .
Facsimil e Features 66 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Print TX Stand by File List (P rint Transmission Standby Fil e List) Use t his fun cti on to pri nt th e tran s- mission standby file list. A Sele ct [ Print TX Standby File Li st ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and the n press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Accessing User Tools (F acsimile Featu res) 67 6 • Print TX St atus Report (Print Transmission Stat us Report) • Manual E-mail Recept ion A Select User Function key yo u want t o progra m. B Select the functi on you want to program in the U ser Function key, and th en press t he { { { { OK } } } } key.
Facsimil e Features 68 6 E-mail Settings ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Internet Fax Settings You can se lect to displ ay [] or not. When you wa nt to send an In- ternet F ax, set On to dis play the icon.
Accessing User Tools (F acsimile Featu res) 69 6 A Sele ct [ On ] using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. B Enter the sen ding e-mail ad- dress with transmissio n permis- sion. C Press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Facsimil e Features 70 6 Stell aC2-AEco mbine -F_FM.b ook Page 70 Tu esday, Ja nuary 13, 2004 1:22 PM.
71 7. Key Operator Setting Key Operator Tools L ist You can also set the line type for the machine connec tion, program Memory Lock I D, fax destinations, and many other items. In additi on, you can c heck the numb er of document s transmitted and received.
Key Operator Set ting 72 7 Using Ke y Opera tor Set tings Counters This f unction allo ws you to check the total num ber of pages trans mitted and rece ived on the display. • Transmissions: Total nu mber of tr ansmitted pages • Recepti ons: Total number of received page s A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key.
Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 73 7 Note ❒ An e-mail address can be set as the forwarding destinati on. ❒ If you do not progra m an End Re- ceiver, the machin e performs printing but not forwarding even with the For war ding func tio n On. ❒ You can progr am one of the User Funct ion ke ys with opera tions for this func tion.
Key Operator Set ting 74 7 Note ❒ If ther e is an End Receiver alre ady progr ammed , a r ecei ver name is shown. If you want to change the receiver, press the { { { { Clear/ Stop } } } } key and proceed to st ep F . ❒ To cancel Forwarding, press the { { { { Cancel } } } } key and p roceed to step G .
Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 75 7 Memory Lock When you switch Memory Lock on, received messages are stored in mem- ory and not print ed automat ically. When a mess age is r eceived in the Memor y Loc k mode , the Recei ve F ile indicato r blinks. To prin t this mes- sage, enter the Memory Lock ID.
Key Operator Set ting 76 7 User P aramet ers User Parameters allow you to customize various settings to suit your needs. To change function settings, set the User Parameter Switches. Prep arat ion Access t o some U ser Param eter Se ttings requires other settings be made be - forehand.
Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 77 7 05 0 Receive S ervice Call ( SC) Conditio n (Substit ute Rece p- tion duri ng service ca ll) Possible (Substi- tute RX) Not possible (Re- ceptio n off) 2, 1 Substitu.
Key Operator Set ting 78 7 18 0 Print date with Fax Heade r Off On 1 Print transmitter origin with Fax Head er Off On 2 Print file numb er with Fax Head er Off On 3 Print p age number with F ax Head e.
Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 79 7 Changing the User Parameters Important ❒ We reco mme nd you pr int an d keep a User Parameter l ist when you program or change a User Pa- rameter. See p.80 “ Printing the User Parameter List ” . ❒ Do not change any bit switch es other than t hose show n on the pre- vious pages.
Key Operator Set ting 80 7 Printing the User Parameter List Print this list t o see the current User Parameter settings. However, only item s of impor tance or often-us ed items are i ncluded in th e list. A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key.
Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 81 7 Home Position Items used for transmitting documents can be set as the home positions. When documents are sc anned and transmiss ion is c ompleted, items au tomatically re- turn to thei r home positions.
Key Operator Set ting 82 7 Imp ortan t ❒ If yo u tu rn th i s f un ct io n of f, th e sca l e o f t he o rig ina l i s m ain ta i ned and some parts o f the image ma y be lost at the other end. • Fax Header Allows the f ax header as the home positi on to be set to on or off.
Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 83 7 Changing the Home Positio n Note ❒ For details about setting parame- ters, see p.76 “ User P aramete rs ” . Follow t he procedu re below to set the home posi tion par ameters. Important ❒ Do not change any bit switch es othe r than tho se sho wn in th e above table.
Key Operator Set ting 84 7 Special Senders t o Treat Differ ently By pr ogra mmin g part icula r receiv ers in advance, you can set the follow ing function for eac h receiver: • Author ized Rece ption • Forwarding • Memor y L ock Use the Own Name or Own Fax Number to program your receivers.
Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 85 7 ❒ You cannot use the foll owing func- tions with Inte rnet Fax recep tions. • Auth orized R ecept ion • Memory Loc k ❒ To use t he Forwardin g, with Inter - net Fax receptions, program the e- mail address of the sender.
Key Operator Set ting 86 7 Referen ce p.91 “ Programm ing a Mem ory Lock ID ” Lim ita tion ❒ If y ou pro gra m the s ame sende r in Memory Lock an d Forward- ing, Forwarding is d isabled. Program ming/ Changi ng Special Send ers A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key.
Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 87 7 I I I I Select the i tem you want to pro- gram using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ You must select only the item you want to program. ❒ To cancel these sett ings, press the { { { { Cancel } } } } key.
Key Operator Set ting 88 7 D Press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. The di splay return s to th at of Step I . Note ❒ After you p erform step J , set "Forwarding" of “ Re ceptio n Settings ” to "On". See p.67 “ Reception Sett ings ” .
Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 89 7 D D D D Sele ct [ Prog ram Spec ial S end er ] us- ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. E E E E Sele ct [ Delete Special S ender ] us ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , an d then press th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Key Operator Set ting 90 7 F F F F Select the func tion you w ant to program. Note ❒ In this feature, “ Autho rized Re- cept ion ” has the same settings as “ Reception Settings ” .
Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 91 7 E E E E Sele ct [ Print S pecial Se nder Lis t ] us- ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ To cancel print ing, press the { { { { Cancel } } } } key.
Key Operator Set ting 92 7 E E E E Enter an ID using the number keys, and then pre ss the { { { { OK } } } } or { { { {# # # #} } } } key . Note ❒ If you make a m istake, press the { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key before pressing the { { { { OK } } } } key, a nd th en try again.
Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 93 7 G3 Analog Lin e You need to ma ke the fol lowing set- tings for the G3 An alog Line befor e you connect the machine to a stand- ard G3 analog line. • When your ma chine is connected through a PA BX, set to Extension.
Key Operator Set ting 94 7 B Select the i tem using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. Selectable item s differ depend - ing on the mach ine de stina tion . or The di splay return s to th at of step A .
95 8. Solving Operation Problems When An Error Repor t is Printed An Error Repor t is pr inted if a mes- sage cannot be successfully sent o r re- ceived . Possib le cause s incl ude a pr oblem with your machine or noise on th e tel- ephone line. If an error occurs during transmissio n, resend the original.
Solving Operat ion Problems 96 8 Turning Off the M ain Po wer/In Cas e of a Power Failure R CAUTIO N: Even if the main pow er switch i s turned off, the con tents of the ma - chine memory (for example, pro- grammed numbers) will not be lost.
When an Error Occurs Us ing Int ernet F ax 97 8 When an Error Occ urs Using Internet Fax Erro r Mail Notifi cat ion The ma chine sends the Error Mail No tification to the sender when i t is unable to successful ly receive a par ticular e -mail message .
Solving Operat ion Problems 98 8 Stell aC2-AEco mbine -F_FM.b ook Page 98 Tu esday, Ja nuary 13, 2004 1:22 PM.
99 9. Appendix Connecti ng the Machine to a Te lephone Line and Tel ephone Connecting the Telephone Line To connect th e machine to a teleph one line, use a snap-in modular type connec- tor. Important ❒ Make s ure the connector i s the co rrect t ype befor e you sta rt.
Appendix 100 9 Speci fications ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Fax Transmission and Reception ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Power Co nsumptio n *1 *1 The mach ine conf igura tio n is m ain unit with the ADF fax u nit , pri nter/ sca nner u nit , and pa per tray u nit. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Internet Fax Transmission and Reception Standard G3 Resolution 8 × 3.
Specificat ions 101 9 *1 Support ed for A4 or smal ler si ze docum ent. Compatible Machines This machi ne can commun icate with Internet Fax mach ines that meet the follow - ing specification requirem ents. *1 Available in f ull mode, dependin g on the other party's setti ngs.
Appendix 102 9 Acceptabl e Types of Originals Make sure your or iginal s are complet ely dry befo re setting them in the machine. Wet ink or corr ecting fluid from ori ginals will mark the exposure glass and affect the resu lting im age.
Specificat ions 103 9 Limitatio n ❒ There may be a difference i n the size of the image when it is printed at the des- tination. ❒ If you place an origi nal larger than A4, 8 1 / 2 " × 11" on the exposure glass, only an A 4, 8 1 / 2 " × 11" area is scanned.
Appendix 104 9 Maximum Values The followi ng list contains the maximum value for each item. Note ❒ The max imum num ber of pages that can be stor ed or transm itt ed may de - crease depending on the contents of docum ents.
105 INDEX A Address B ook , 48 Applicat ions Stor ed on the CD-ROM , 48 Aut hor ized Rec ept ion , 67 , 85 Auto Fax Reception P ower- up , 39 Automatic Redial , 29 Auto Reduce , 81 Auto run pro gram ,.
106 AE AE B168-8658 L Label Ins ertion , 9 LAN-Fax Cover Shee t Editor , 48 Driver , 48 Erro r Report , 57 Operatio n Messages , 57 Properties, Se tting , 48 Result by E-mail , 57 Line Type Sele ct in.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book= 112 // P rint scal e=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thick ness / 2 = 4.480000 mm Intr oduc tio n This man ual des cribes d etaile d instr uctions on the operat ion and notes about t he use of th is machi ne.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book= 112 // P rint scal e=81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thick ness / 2 = 4.
Network Guide For safe and correct use of this machine, please be sure to read the Safety Information in the "Copy Referen ce" before you use it.
Introduction This manu al descri bes detail ed instruc tions o n the operatio n and no tes about the use of this m achine. To get m aximum versat ility fro m this mach ine all operators are requested to read this m anual c arefull y and follo w the in structi ons.
i Manuals for This Machine The following manuals describe the operational procedures of this machine. For particular function s, see the relevant parts of the manual. Note ❒ Manuals provided are specific to machine type. ❒ Adobe Acrobat Reader is n ecessary to view the manuals as a PDF file.
ii ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manuals for DeskTopBinde r V2 Lite DeskTopBinder V2 Lite is a u tility included on the CD-ROM labeled “ Scanner Driver & Document Manag ement Utilities ” . • DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Setup Guide (PDF file - CD-ROM2) Describes i nstallation of, and the operating env ironment for DeskTop- Binder V2 Lite in d etail.
iii TABLE OF CONTENTS Manuals for This Machine ...... ....... ....... ....... .......... ....... ....... ........ ....... ....... ....... ...... i How to Read Thi s Manual ........... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... ......
iv 5. U sing the Printe r Function Printing wi th Windows ....... ..... ........ ....... ....... ........ ..... ....... ........ ....... ....... ........ .... 47 Printing wi th a Windows 2 000/XP, Windo ws Server 2003 or Window s NT 4.0 Print Server .
v Understanding Di splayed Info rmation ....... .......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ........ 105 Print J ob Inform ation .. ......... ...... .......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ......... .......... ...... ........ 105 Print L og Inform ation .
vi.
1 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the following sy mbols are used: R WARNING: This sym bol indicates a potentia lly hazardo us situat ion which, if instruction s are not followed, could result in death or serious inj ury.
2 Names of Major Components a nd Software The following software products ar e referred to using a general name: • DeskT opBinder V2 Lite and DeskT opBinder V2 profession al → De skT op- Binder V2.
3 1. Functions Available over a Netwo rk This ma chine prov ides prin ter, LA N-Fax, Inter net Fax , an d scanner funct ions over a network. Using the Printer The network interfac e board is compatible wi th NetWare *1 (IPX/SPX, TCP/IP), Windows NT 4.
Functions Available over a Network 4 1 Using Fax Internet Fax This machine converts scann ed document images to e-mail format and transmits the data over the Internet. Specify the e-mail addres s instead of the fa x number, and then sen d the docu- ment .
Using Fax 5 1 LAN-Fax You can fax documents over phone lines from any computer connected to the machine via Ethern et, IEEE 1394 (IP over 1 394), or IEEE 8 02.11b (wireless LAN). To send a fax, print from the Windows application you ar e working with, select LAN-Fax as the printer, and then sp ecify the destination.
Functions Available over a Network 6 1 Network Scanner E-mail Scan f ile atta ched to an e- mail ca n be s ent usi ng the e- mail s ystem through a LAN or the In ternet. Reference For details abo ut what settings to make, see p.15 “ Setting Up the Ma chine on a Network ” .
Network Scanner 7 1 Network De livery Scanner You can use the machine as a delivery scanner for Sc anRouter V2 Lite / Profes- sional. Scan file or document received by fax can be stored in the delivery server, or de- livered via the network to specified folders on client computers.
Functions Available over a Network 8 1 Network T WAIN Scan ner You can use the scann ing function o f this machine from a comp uter connect ed via a network (Ethe rnet, IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394), or IEE E 802.11b (wireless LAN)). You can sc an documen ts the same way you woul d if you wer e using a scan ner connect ed direct ly to your c omputer.
9 2. Connecting the Network Cable to the Network Confirming the Connection 1. 10BASE-T/100BASE -TX port Port for connecting the 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX cable 2.
Connecting the Network Cable to the Network 10 2 Connectin g to the Eth ernet Interf ace The network interface board supp orts 10BASE-T or 1 00BASE-TX connec - tions. A A A A Turn o ff the main power s witch. Important ❒ Make sure the main po wer is off.
Confirming the Connection 11 2 Connecting to the IEEE 13 94 Interf ace Important ❒ Before maki ng the co nnectio n, touch the metallic part to ground your self. Note ❒ Use the inter face cable supplied with the IE EE 1394 i nterface board (optional).
Connecting the Network Cable to the Network 12 2 Confirming the Connection A A A A Make s ure the LE D of the IE EE 802.11b card is l it. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When using in inf rastructure mode 1. If it is co nnect ed pr oper ly t o the network, the LED is green when in infrast ructure mode.
Confirming the Connection 13 2 Checkin g the m achine 's radi o wave status When using in infrastructure mode, you can check the machine's radio wave status using the contr ol panel. Note ❒ To check the radio wave s tatus, se- lect [ IEEE 802.
Connecting the Network Cable to the Network 14 2.
15 3. Setting Up the Machine on a Network User Tools Menu ( System Settings ) This section des cribes the network settin gs you can change with User Tools (Sys- tem Set tings ). Make se ttin gs accordin g to fu nctions you want t o use and the in- terface to be connected.
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 16 3 *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 inter face board ( optional) is install ed. *2 Appears when the IEEE 802 .11b unit (op tional) i s installed . If Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b (wir eless LAN) are both connected to the machine, the selected int erface has priority .
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 17 3 Internet Fax Interface Se ttings Ethernet Interface Set tings/ Network See p.28 “ Interfa ce Settings /Network ” . IP Addr ess $ Gateway Address $ DNS Configuration ❍ WINS Configuration ❍ Effective Protocol *5 $ LAN Ty pe *2 $ Ethernet Sp eed ❍ Host Name ❍ Domain Name ❍ File Transfer See p.
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 18 3 IEEE 1394 (IP over 1394) Interface Settings/ IEEE 13 94 *1 See p.29 “ Interfa ce Settin gs/IEE E 1394 ” . IP Addr ess $ WINS Configuration ❍ IP ove r 1394 $ Host Name ❍ Domain Name ❍ Interface Settings/ Network See p.
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 19 3 *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 inter face board ( optional) is install ed. *2 Appears when the IEEE 802 .11b unit (op tional) i s installed . If Ethernet and 802.11b (w ireless LAN) are both connected to t he machine, the select- ed inte rface has pr iority.
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 20 3 E-mail Interface Se ttings Ethernet Interface Set tings/ Network See p.28 “ Interfa ce Settings /Network ” . IP Addr ess $ Gateway Address $ DNS Configuration ❍ WINS Configuration ❍ Effective Protocol *3 $ LAN Ty pe *2 $ Ethernet Sp eed ❍ Host Name ❍ Domain Name ❍ File Transfer See p.
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 21 3 *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 inter face board ( optional) is install ed. *2 App ears whe n the 80 2.11b u nit (opt ional) i s instal led. If Ethernet and 802.11b (w ireless LAN) are both connected to t he machine, the select- ed inte rface has pr iority.
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 22 3 Network De livery Scanner Interface Se ttings Ethernet Interface Set tings/ Network See p.28 “ Interfa ce Settings /Network ” .
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 23 3 *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 inter face board ( optional) is install ed. *2 Appears when the IEEE 802 .11b unit (op tional) i s installed . If Ethernet and IEEE 802.11b (wir eless LAN) are both connected to the machine, the selected int erface has priority .
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 24 3 *1 Appears when the IEEE 139 4 inter face board ( optional) is install ed. *2 Appears when the IEEE 802 .11b unit (op tional) i s installed . If Ethernet and 802.11b (w ireless LAN) are both connected to t he machine, the select- ed inte rface has pr iority.
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 25 3 Networ k Configur ation Any change you make with User Tool s rema ins in effe ct even if th e main power sw itch or operation switch is turne d off, or the { { { { Clear Modes } } } } key is pressed.
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 26 3 Configuring the network using othe r utilities As well as using the control panel to make network settings, utilities such as a We b br owser an d Smar tDev ice Mo nito r for Adm in can also be u sed. The fol low- ing table shows available s ettings: Note ❒❍ Indic ates machine s ettings can be changed .
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 27 3 *1 You can make the TCP/IP settings if SmartDeviceMo nitor for Admin is communi- cati ng wi th the m achin e usin g IPX /SPX . *2 You can make the IP X/SPX sett ings if Smar tDeviceMo nitor for Ad min is communi- cati ng wi th the m ach ine us ing T CP/I P.
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 28 3 Settings You C an Change with User Tool s Interfa ce Settings/Net work ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ IP Address Before using this machine in the netw ork en viro nmen t, you must configure the I P address and sub- net ma sk.
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 29 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Effective Protocol Select the protoco l to use in the network. • TCP/IP:Effective/In valid • NetWare:Effective/Invalid • SMB:Effective/Inva.
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 30 3 ❒ When you use the IEEE 1394 in- terf ace on a networ k, you can- not use the Ethern et interf ace in the same domain. To use b oth interfaces in the same domain, set di fferen t value s for [ Sub-net Mask: ] .
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 31 3 Interfac e Setti ngs/IE EE 802.1 1b Preparation You must install the IEEE 802.11b unit (optional) into the machine. Note ❒ Be sure to make all settings simul- taneo usly. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Communication M ode Specifies the communication mode of th e wireless LAN.
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 32 3 Interface Settings/Print I/F Settings List You can check i tems relat ed to the network in use. Reference For details about printin g, see p.
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 33 3 ❒ [ Encryp t: ] - [ On ] : If the authentica- tion meth od is CRAM-MD5. ❒ [ Encryp t: ] - [ Off ] : I f the authentica- tion method is PLAIN, or LOGIN. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ POP before SMTP You can configure POP aut hentica- tion (POP before SMTP).
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 34 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Key Operator' s E-mail Add. If the sender is not specifie d on e- mailed scanned documents, this appears as the s ender ’ s addr ess. This can be used as the sender with SMTP authentication for Internet Fax.
User Tools Menu (System Settings) 35 3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Fax Mail Reception Account Spec ify [ E-mail Address ] , [ User Name ] , and [ Password ] for receiving Inte rnet f axes. • E-mail Address • User Na me • Password Limitatio n ❒ Enter an e-mail address using up to 128 a lphanumeric charac- ters .
Setting Up the Machine on a Network 36 3 Delet ing a subje ct A Select [ Del ete ] us ing { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key. B Select the subject using { { { {U U U U} } } } or { { { {T T T T} } } } , and then pr ess the { { { { OK } } } } key.
37 4. Windows Configuration Configuring TCP/I P This de scribes h ow to conf igure Win- dows for TCP/I P and IPP. Configuring a Windows 95/98/Me Computer Follow th e procedure below to con- figure a Windows 9 5/98/Me compu- ter to use TCP/ IP. A A A A Open [ Control Panel ] , and then double-click the Network icon .
Windows Configuration 38 4 Configuring a Windows XP Computer Follow th e procedure below to con- figur e a Windo ws XP co mput er to use TCP/IP. A A A A On the [ Start ] men u, cli ck [ Contro l Pane l ] , and then click [ Network and Internet Connections ] .
Configuring TCP/IP 39 4 Configur ing a Windows NT 4. 0 Computer Follow th e procedure below to con- figure a Windows NT 4. 0 computer to use TCP/IP. A A A A Open [ Control Panel ] , and then double-click the Network icon . Make sure [ TCP/IP Protocol ] is se- lected in the [ Network pro tocols ] box on the [ Protocols ] ta b.
Windows Configuration 40 4 Configuring NetBEUI This de scribes h ow to conf igure Win- dows to use Ne tBEUI. Limita tion ❒ NetBEU I cannot be use d under Windows XP. Note ❒ NetBEUI appears as SMB in the control pa nel, manual, and rel ated utilities.
Configuring NetBEUI 41 4 Configur ing a Windows NT 4. 0 Computer Follow th e procedure below to con- figure a Windows NT 4. 0 computer to use NetBE UI. A A A A Open [ Control Panel ] , and then double-click the Network icon . Make su re [ NetBEUI Protocol ] is listed in the [ Network protoco ls ] box on th e [ Protocols ] tab.
Windows Configuration 42 4.
43 5. Using the Printer Function This section cont ains in structions f or con figuring the m achine a s a netw ork printer. Read th e section th at relates to yo ur network en vironment for informa- tion about correct c onfiguration. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printing with a Windows 2000/XP, Windows Se rver 2003, or Windows NT 4.
Using the Printer Function 44 5 • Printi ng wi thou t a pri nt se rver Note ❒ Under W indows X P, you c annot pr int via Ne tBEUI us ing SMB. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printing with a Macintosh To set up the machine as a network prin ter in a Macin tosh environment, see p.
45 5 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printing with NetWare To set up the machine as a print server or remote printer in a NetWare envi- ronment, see p .53 “ Prin ti ng with NetWa re ” . Th e network interface board al- lows you to use the machine as either a print server or a remote print er.
Using the Printer Function 46 5 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printing with UNIX For UNIX printing in formation, visit ou r Web site or c onsult your au thorized dealer.
Printing with Windows 47 5 Printing with Windows Printi ng with a Windows 2000/XP , Windows Server 2003 or Windows NT 4.0 Print Server This describes how to configure a cli- ent computer on a network using Windows 2000/XP, Window s Server 2003, Windows NT 4.
Using the Printer Function 48 5 E E E E On the ne twork tree, double-click the name of t he co mpu ter us ed as the print server. The printers connected t o the net- work are displayed. F F F F Click the name of the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ] .
Printing with Windows 49 5 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ NetBEU I Note ❒ Do not use NetB EUI un- der W indows X P. A Click [ NetBEUI ] , and then click [ Sear ch ] . Available printers are l ist- ed. B Click the printer you want to use, and then click [ OK ] . Note ❒ Printers that res pond to a broadcast from the com- puter wi ll be displayed.
Using the Printer Function 50 5 Stan dard TCP/I P Port A Cli ck [ Standard TCP/IP ] , and then click [ Ne w Port ] . B In t he [ Add Standa rd TCP/IP Print- er Port Wizard ] dialog box, cli ck [ Next ] . C In t he [ Printer Name or IP Address ] box, ent er the print er name or IP address, and then clic k [ Next ] .
Printing with a Macintosh 51 5 Printing with a Macintosh This des cribes how to con figure a Macinto sh comp uter to us e EtherTalk. Actual pr ocedures ma y vary depending on the version of the Mac O S. The foll owing proce dure s describe h ow to c onfigure Ma c OS 9.
Using the Printer Function 52 5 Configur ing the Printer Use the control panel to activate the AppleTalk protocol. (The default is active.) Reference For more in format ion about con - figuration , see p.
Printing with NetWare 53 5 Printing with NetWare This describes how to configure the machine for use a s a print server or remote printer in a NetWare environ- ment . This secti on assu mes NetW are is functional and the necessary environ- ment for the NetWare print service is available.
Using the Printer Function 54 5 H H H H Select the [ NetWare ] chec k box, and then click [ Next > ] . I I I I Click [ Bindery Mode ] , enter the file server na me in the [ File Server Name: ] box, an d then click [ Ne xt > ] .
Printing with NetWare 55 5 F F F F Click [ Wizard ] , and then click [ OK ] . G G G G If necessary, enter the print server name in the [ Device Nam e: ] box, and then click [ Next > ] . H H H H Select the [ NetWare ] chec k box, and then click [ Next > ] .
Using the Printer Function 56 5 Using P ureIP in t he NetW are 5/5. 1, 6 environ ment Note ❒ When not using IPX, it is recom- mended that you change the print server protocol in the W eb browser from [ TCP/ IP+ IPX ] to [ TCP/IP ] . A A A A Log on to the file server as an ad- ministrator, or equivalent.
Printing with NetWare 57 5 Note ❒ As co ntext, ob ject na mes are entered in lower object order and div ided b y a period. Fo r exampl e, if you want to cr e- ate a prin t server into NET unde r d, e nte r “ d ” . F In th e [ Pri nt Se rver Oper atio n Mode ] area, click [ As Print Serv- er ] .
Using the Printer Function 58 5 I I I I Enter “ PCONS OLE ” from the co m- mand p rompt . F:> P CONSO LE J J J J Create a print queue as follows: Note ❒ If you are using a currently d e- fine.
Printing with NetWare 59 5 M M M M Press the { { { { ESC } } } } key until the “ Ex- it? ” appears, and then click [ Yes ] to qu it PCON SOLE. N N N N Start the print server by entering the fo llowing fr om the N etWare server's keyb oard. If it is runni ng, resta rt after quit - ting .
Using the Printer Function 60 5 Limitation ❒ Enter up to 32 alphanumeric characte rs ( “ - ” and “ _ ” can be used). E In the [ NDS Conte xt: ] box , enter the context in which the print server is to be created. Limitation ❒ Enter up to 127 alphanumer- ic characters.
Printing with NetWare 61 5 E After checking the settings, click [ OK ] . M M M M Create a print server as follows: A Select t he context s pecified us- ing NIB Setup Tool (Step G G G G - B B B B ), and o n the [ Object ] menu , click [ Create ] . B In the [ Class of new object ] list, click [ Pr int Server ] , and then click [ OK ] .
Using the Printer Function 62 5 Reference For more information about in- stalling the printer driver, see Printer Refer ence 1 . Note ❒ Any po rt can be sel ected d uring ins talla tion. Howe ver, L PT1 is recomm ended. B B B B On the [ Sta rt ] menu, point to [ Set- tings ] , and then click [ Pr int ers ] .
Printing with NetWare 63 5 C C C C Insert the CD-ROM labeled “ Printer Drivers and Utilities ” into the CD-ROM drive, and then click [ Hav e Disk ] . If the setup menu starts automati- cally, y ou can proceed t o the nex t step. If not, see Printer Referen ce 1 .
Using the Printer Function 64 5.
65 6. Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client SmartDeviceMonitor for Client SmartDeviceMonito r for Client is equipped with the following functions. We recommend all users of this printe r to install this software.
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client 66 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ What can it d o? • Peer-to-Peer print f unction • Print directly on the netw ork printer without a prin t server. • Print on a substitute printer if too man y jobs accumulate in the specified printer, or if an error di sables printing (Recovery Printing).
SmartDeviceMonitor for Client 67 6 Reference For more information about using Recovery Printing/Parallel Printing, see SmartDeviceMonitor for Client Help.
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Client 68 6 Displaying the Stat us of Mach ines Follow the procedure below to monitor machine status using SmartDeviceMon- itor for Client. A A A A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Client . B B B B The status of machines is d isplayed on th e SmartDeviceMonitor fo r Client icon on the taskbar.
69 7. Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, not only can yo u monitor the status of network pri nters, but you c an also chan ge th e configu ration of the netwo rk in- terface board using TCP/IP or IPX /SPX protoc ol.
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin 70 7 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ What can it d o? • Limit setting s done from the con trol pan el, a nd dis able c hange s made t o certain items . • Select of paper type loaded in the machine. • Switch to, and com e out of Energy Sa ver mode.
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin 71 7 Changing the Network Interf ace Board Confi guration Limita tion ❒ Internet Explorer 4.01 or a later ver- sion is required to use NIB Setup Tool. A A A A Start Smar tDev iceM onit or f or Ad- min. B B B B On the [ Group ] m enu , poin t to [ Searc h Devi ce ] , and the n click [ TCP/IP ] or [ IPX/SP X ] .
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin 72 7 Locking t he Con trol Panel Menu A A A A Start Smar tDev iceM onit or f or Ad- min. B B B B On the [ Group ] m enu , poin t to [ Searc h Devi ce ] , and the n click [ TCP/IP ] or [ IPX/SP X ] . A list of machines appears.
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin 73 7 Managing U ser I nformatio n A A A A Start Smar tDev iceM onit or f or Ad- min. B B B B On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Devi ce ] , an d then click [ TCP/IP ] or [ IPX/SPX ] . A list of machines appears. Note ❒ Select the prot ocol of the ma- chine f or whi ch yo u want to change configurat ion.
Using SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin 74 7 Managing A ddress Infor matio n A A A A Start SmartDeviceMonitor for Admi n. B B B B On the [ Group ] menu, point to [ Search Devi ce ] , an d then click [ TCP/IP ] or [ IPX/SPX ] . A list of machines appears. Note ❒ Select the prot ocol of the ma- chine f or whi ch yo u want to change configurat ion.
75 8. Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser You can chec k the status of a m achine and chan ge its settings usin g the Web browser. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ What can it d o? You can remotely check the status of a machine or specify its settings over the network usi ng a comput er's Web brows er.
Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser 76 8 Going to the Top Page 1. Header area You can reg ister favorite URLs using [ URL ] . To view the Help section, click [ Help ] . 2. Menu area These menus are for configuring the net- work inter face board and checking ma- chine status.
Types of Menu Configuration and Mode 77 8 Types of Menu Configurat ion and Mode Items that appear on the menu area d iffer between u ser mode and administr ator mode . The work area whic h appe ars under the selected menu d isplays machine status under user m ode and machi ne status and setti ngs under ad ministrator mode.
Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser 78 8 *1 You can make the IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 1 394, or parallel interf ace setting s. You can a lso check the Eth ernet status. Reference For more information about displaying statu s and changing settings, see p.
Verifying the Network Interface Board Settings 79 8 Verifying the Network Interface Board Settings A A A A Start the Web br owser. B B B B In th e [ A ddress ] box, enter th e ma- chine' s IP addre ss (for ex ample http:/ /XXX.XX X,XXX,X XX, where the Xs are th e numbers of the IP address ).
Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser 80 8 Configuring the Network Interface Board Settings A A A A Start the Web br owser. B B B B In th e [ A ddress ] box, enter th e ma- chine' s IP addre ss (for ex ample http:/ /XXX.XX X,XXX,X XX, where the Xs are th e numbers of the IP address ).
Using Help on the Web Browser 81 8 Using Help on the Web Browser Whe n usin g Help fo r the fi rst ti me , clicki ng either [ Help ] in the header area or th e icon marked “ ? ” in th e work area makes the following s creen appear.
Configuring the Network Interface Board Using a Web Browser 82 8.
83 9. Appendix Remote Maintenance by telnet You can view p rinter status and c on- figure the network interface board us- ing telnet. Note ❒ You shou ld s pecif y a p assw ord so only the network adm inistrator, or a person wi th network admin istra- tor pri vilege s, can us e remote mainte nance.
Appendix 84 9 Commands List Use t he “ help ” command to displa y remote maintena nce use. Note ❒ Enter “ help ” to display a lis t of commands that can be used. msh> h elp ❒ Enter “ help command_na me ” to display information about the syn- tax of that command.
Remote Maintenance by telnet 85 9 - - - - Address ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Subnet Mask A number us ed to numerical ly “ mask ” or hide the IP a ddress on the network by eliminating t hose parts of the address that are alike for all machines on the network.
Appendix 86 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Access control ini tialization msh> acc ess fl ush Note ❒ This restores the factory de fault so all access ranges be come “ 0.0.0.0 ” . DHCP Use the “ dhcp ” command to con fig- ure the DHCP settings. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Reference The fo llo wing c omman d di splays the current DHCP setting s.
Remote Maintenance by telnet 87 9 Note ❒ I f y o u p r o h i b i t r e m o t e a c c e s s v i a TCP/IP and then lo g out, you can- not use re mote access.
Appendix 88 9 ❒ Default access settings 1 and 2 are as follows: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Display Shows SNMP informat ion and available protocols. msh> snm p ? The followin g command displays the settings of registered number specifi ed. msh> sn mp [ registe red_nu mber ] Omit ting the num ber di spla ys al l access set tings.
Remote Maintenance by telnet 89 9 Note ❒ To specify TCP/IP pr otocol , en- ter “ ip ” followed by a space, and then the I P address. ❒ To specify the IPX/S PX proto- col, enter “ ipx ” followed by a space, and then the IPX add ress followed by a decima l, and then the MAC address of the net- work interface board.
Appendix 90 9 Direct printing port The direct printing port allows print- ing directly fro m a computer, con- nected to the n etwork, to the printer. Use t he “ diprint ” command to change direct printing po rt settings.
Remote Maintenance by telnet 91 9 SMB Use the “ smb ” comm and to co nfigu re or delete the NetBEU I settings such as the computer name or workgroup name. msh> sm b para meter Note ❒ You canno t use a comp uter name starting with “ RN P ” or “ rnp ” .
Appendix 92 9 SPRINT Use the “ sprint ” comma nd to v iew and configure SCSI p rint (SBP-2) on IEEE 1394. Limita tion ❒ You ca n use this func tion when th e optional IEEE 1394 board is in- stalled.
Remote Maintenance by telnet 93 9 Note ❒ Wh en c han gin g the in terf ace to IEEE 802.11b, see p.84 “ TCP/IP address ” . ❒ When configuring the IEEE 802.11b TCP/IP , see p.84 “ TCP/IP ad- dress ” . Changing the host name Use the “ hostname ” comman d to change the printer nam e.
Appendix 94 9 Note ❒ Enter the printer name using up to 15 characte rs. ❒ You cannot u se a printer name starting with “ RN P ” or “ rnp ” . ❒ The Ethernet interface and I EEE 802.11b int erface will have the same printer name. WINS Use the “ wins ” command to config- ure WINS server set tings.
Remote Maintenance by telnet 95 9 AutoNet Use the “ autonet ” comma nd to c on- figure AutoNe t settings. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Display The fo llo wing c omman d di splays the current AutoN et settings. msh> aut onet ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Configuration You ca n confi gure t he Aut oNet setting s.
Appendix 96 9 DNS Use the “ dns ” command to c onfig ure or display DNS (Domain Name Sys- tem) settings . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ View settin g The fo llo wing c omman d di splays current DNS sett ings : .
Remote Maintenance by telnet 97 9 - - - - Setting Protocols The protoc ols described in this sec- tion provide various funct ions that can b e u sed o n the m ach ine. Important ❒ If a protocol is disabled or inactive, functions provided by that proto- col cannot be used.
Appendix 98 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ SNMP • Bidi rectional communicat ion func- tion usi ng a pri nter driv er • Function to obtain d evice infor- mation us ing SmartDeviceMon- itor for Client/Admin ❖ .
Using DHCP 99 9 Using DHCP You can use the printer in a DHCP en- vironment. You can also register the printer N etBIOS name on a WINS server when it is ru nning.
Appendix 100 9 Note ❒ If a static address is not selected, or i s set t o 0.0. 0.0, th e int erface using the addres s assigned by DHC P is used . Note ❒ Printers that register the p rinter NetBIO S name on a WINS serve r mus t be conf igure d for the WINS server.
SNMP 101 9 SNMP The machine is equ ipped with an SNMP (Simple Network Management Proto- col) agent that operates under UDP and IPX on the Ethernet/wireles s LAN in- terface, and UDP on th e IEEE 1394 ( IP over 1394) in terface. Us ing the SNMP manager yo u can get information about the machin e.
Appendix 102 9 Error Messages on the Display This sec tion describes the most common netwo rk-related messages that appear on the display. If a message not described here appears, act accordin g to that mess age. Messages witho ut Code Numbers Reference Before turning the main power off, see “ Tur ning On the Po wer ” , Cop y Re fer- ence .
Error Messages on the Display 103 9 Messages with Cod e Numbers Note ❒ A message reporting an error appea rs on the display as shown. Message Causes Solutions Code numbers Cannot connect with DHCP server The DHCP server cannot be found. Check the DHCP s erver is running on the network.
Appendix 104 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Code Numbers The problem interface is displayed. • 1XX: Ethernet • 2XX: IEEE 802.11b • 3XX: IEEE 1394 • 0XX: Independent of inte rface ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Order of priority of me ssages (when multiple errors occ ur) Order of interface priori ty • 1.
Understanding Displayed Information 105 9 Understanding Displayed Information This section descri bes how to read the status information returned by the net- work interface board. Print J ob In format ion Print job status can be viewed using the following c ommands: • telnet : Use the “ status ” command.
Appendix 106 9 Machine St atus and Configur ation You can ch eck the mach ine status an d configurat ion using telnet or UNIX. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ telnet Use the “ info ” or “ status ” command . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ UNIX Use the “ lpr ” or “ lpstat ” command, or “ stat ” , “ info ” parameter of rsh, rc p, or ftp.
Understanding Displayed Information 107 9 Machin e configuration Note ❒ “ * ” (asterisk) is displayed with the current setting. ❒ Regarding *1-*5, see table below. Misma tch: Paper Size and Type Indicated paper t ray do es not c ontain p aper of selec ted s ize and type.
Appendix 108 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ *1 Input Tray : Name ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ *2 Input Tray : Paper Size ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ *3 Input Tray : Status Output Tray No. ID number of the output tra y Name Name of the output tray *4 Statu s Current status of the output tray *5 Name Descript ion Tray X Name of installed paper tray (X is the number of tray.
Understanding Displayed Information 109 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ *4 Output Tray: Name ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ *5 Output Tray: Status Configur ing the Network Int erface Board The network interface board settings can be displayed using the commands be- low. • telnet : Use the “ show ” command.
Appendix 110 9 Apple Talk Mod e Apple Talk prot oco l sel ecte d Net Network number Object Macintosh printer name Type The type o f print er Zone Name of zone the printer belongs to TCP/IP Mode “ Up ” me ans activ e, “ Down ” means inactive.
Understanding Displayed Information 111 9 NetW are EncapType Frame typ e RPRINTER num ber Remote printer number Print serve r name Print server name File server name Name of the connect f ile server C.
Appendix 112 9 *1 You can displa y these item names when i nstalling t he optional 1394 inter face board. *2 ✩ represents a t arget number be tween 1 and 5. *3 You can display the se item names when install ing the optional 802.11b inter face unit. *4 ✩ represents a t arget number be tween 1 and 3.
Message List 113 9 Message List This is a list of messa ges written to the machine's system log. The syste m log can be viewed using the “ syslog ” comm and. System Log Info rmation You can use the following methods to view the system log: • telnet : Use the “ syslog ” command.
Appendix 114 9 Change IP address from DHCP Server. The IP address change s when DHCP LEASE is renewed. To a lways assign t he same IP a d- dress, se t a stat ic IP addr ess to th e DHCP serv - er. child process exec error! (p rocess name) The network service failed to star t.
Message List 115 9 IEEE 802.11 b <Transmis sion mo de> m ode Trans mission mode for IEE E 802.1 1b (Example: current mode is infrastr ucture mod e.) IEEE 80 2.11b [infras tructure] mode (Exam ple: c urren t mode is 802. 11 ad h oc mod e.) IEEE 802.
Appendix 116 9 <Interface>: Subnet overlap. Subnet from Netmask and the IP addres s you tri ed to set f or <In terf ace > ov erlap the su bne t of another interface. Set Subnet so it does not overlap with another interface. IPP cancel-job: permission denied.
Message List 117 9 permission denied. Job ca ncellation was determined to be unau- thorized after checking the user name and host ad dress (ex cept for ROO T auth orization ). phy release file open failed. A replacement network interface board is re- quired.
Appendix 118 9 Snmp over ipx is ready. Communi cation over I PX vi a SNMP i s avai labl e. snmpd start. SNMP s ervice has start ed. starte d. Direct print s ervic e has s tarted. The print server received error <error number> during a ttempt to log in to the net- wor k.
Message List 119 9 SMTPC: failed to connect smtp server. Failed to connect the SMTP server. This could be be cau se: • There is no c onnection to the network. • The network configuration is inc orrect, so there is no response from the SMTP se rver.
Appendix 120 9 When Using Windows Terminal Service/MetaFrame Operating Environmen t The follo wing combina tions of ope r- ating system and MetaFrame are sup - ported: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Windows NT Server 4. 0 Termin al Serv- er Ed ition • MetaFrame 1.
When Using Windows Terminal Service/MetaFrame 121 9 • When print ing a large number of bitmap images or us ing the serv er in a WAN envi ronmen t over dial-up lines su ch as ISDN, depending on th e data rat e, printing may be disabled or er- ro rs ma y o ccu r.
Appendix 122 9 Precautions Please pay attention to the follo wing when usin g the netw ork i nterface board. When configuration is n eces- sary, fol low the ap propri ate proce- dures b elow .
Precautions 123 9 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When a d ial-up router is connec ted in a network envi ronment The settings for the delivery server to b e conn ected mu st be made ap- propriately for the machine with Scan Route r V2 L ite/P rofes siona l, Auto Doc ument Link , or Des kTop- Binder V2 Lite/Pr ofessi onal .
Appendix 124 9 • Under Windows 95/98/Me, clear the [ For m feed ] check box on the [ Printer Settings ] tab in the pri nte r properties dialog box . • Under Windows 2000/XP, clear the [ For m feed ] check box on the [ NetWare Settings ] tab in the printer properties dialog box .
Precautions 125 9 • A n I P a d d r e s s c a n n o t b e u s e d f o r the IPP port name because the IP addres s is us ed for th e SmartDe- vic eMo nito r fo r Cli ent po rt na me.
Appendix 126 9 Specifications *1 The 1394 int erface boa rd suppor ts only TCP/IP . *2 Use the SmartDeviceMo nitor fo r Client p ort. *3 To use IPP u nder Windows XP o r Windows Serv er 2003, use the Standar d IPP port. Note , in Sma rtDe viceM onit or for Cl ient how ever, this po rt doe s not su pport digest access authen tication.
127 INDEX A Access Control , 85 access type , 88 AutoNet , 95 , 100 B Bidirectional SCSI print , 30 Broadcast addre ss , 85 C Cha nne l , 31 Commun ication Mod e , 31 Commun ication Sp eed , 31 commun.
128 GB GB EN USA B683-8640 S SCSI print (SBP-2) , 30 SLP , 91 SmartDeviceM onitor for Client , 124 SMB , 91 SMTP Server , 32 SNMP , 87 , 10 1 specification s , 126 SPRINT , 92 SSID Setti ng , 31 subne.
Copyri ght © 2003.
Network Guide GB GB EN USA B683-8640.
PostScript 3 Operating I nstructions Supplement.
Introduction This manu al descri bes detail ed instruc tions o n the operatio n and no tes about the use of this m achine. To get m aximum versat ility fro m this mach ine all operators are requested to read this m anual c arefull y and follo w the in structi ons.
i TABLE OF CONTENTS How to Read Thi s Manual ........... ......... ......... ......... .......... ......... ......... ....... ......... ... 1 1. PostScri pt 3 Ins tallab le O ptions .. ....... ...... ....... .... ....... ....... ...... ..... ...... ..
ii.
1 How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the following sy mbols are used: R WARNING: This sym bol indicates a potentia lly hazardo us situat ion which, if instruction s are not followed, could result in death or serious inj ury.
2.
3 1. PostScript 3 Installable Options The following options ar e available: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Input Paper Device •L o w e r P a p e r T r a y Setting Up Options To use installed option s correctly, first set up the p rinter driver. If the options are not recognized, you cannot use them, even though they are p hysically installed.
PostS crip t 3 4 1 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Mac O S You can set up all options using the [ Chooser ] dial og box. Limitatio n ❒ Under Mac OS X , this function is no t available.
Printing a Document 5 1 Printing a Document This section descr ibes how to print documents from an application. Note ❒ The Mac OS X referred to in this section is Mac OS 10.1. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Paper Source The following ta ble shows where you can select this func tion.
PostS crip t 3 6 1 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Collate Use this function to enable collation. With it, the printer can efficiently print collated sets of multiple-page documents.
Printing a Document 7 1 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Toner Saving Use this f unction to reduce the amount of tone r used when p rinting. Limitatio n ❒ When [ Toner Saving ] i s selected, [ Edge Smoothing ] is disabled. Note ❒ This will inc rease the life of the toner, but the output wi ll appear slightl y lighter.
PostS crip t 3 8 1 Windows 20 00 A A A A From an application, click [ Print ] on the [ File ] menu. The [ Pr int ] dialog box appears . B B B B Click the [ Paper/Quality ] tab. C C C C Click [ Adva nced ... ] . The [ Advanced Opt ions ] dialog box appears.
Printing a Document 9 1 Windows NT 4.0 A A A A From an application, click [ Print ] on the [ File ] menu. The [ Pr int ] dialog box appears . B B B B Select the printer, and then click [ Properties ] . C C C C Click the [ Advanced ] tab. D D D D Fro m [ Document Options ] , click [ Print Mode ] to select the function you want to use.
PostS crip t 3 10 1 Printer Utility for Mac By using Prin ter Utility for Mac, you ca n download fon ts, cha nge the printer name, and so on. Limita tion ❒ If the Macint osh and prin ter are connec ted by USB, you can not use Print er Utility for Mac.
Printer Utility for Mac 11 1 Starti ng Printer Utility for Mac This descri bes how to start Printer Utility for Mac. Mac OS Important ❒ Before starting Printer Utility for M ac, make sure the printer is selected in [ Chooser ] on the Apple menu. A A A A Double-click the Printer Utility for Mac icon .
PostS crip t 3 12 1 Printe r Utility for Ma c Functi ons Printer Utility for Mac functions are described below. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Apple menu (Mac O S), Printer Ut ility for Mac m enu (Mac OS X) • [ About Printer Utility for Mac... ] • [ Choose Printer.
Printer Utility for Mac 13 1 Downloadin g PS Fo nts You can do wnload the PS fonts to the machine m emory. Important ❒ The following downl oad procedure as sumes you are a s ystem administrator. If you a re not, consult you r system adm inistrat or.
PostS crip t 3 14 1 Deleting Fonts You can de lete font s from machine memory. A A A A On the [ Fi le ] menu, click [ Display Printer's Fonts... ] . The dialog box appea rs. B B B B Select the fonts you want to d elete. Limitatio n ❒ You cannot delete fonts that appear in italics.
Printer Utility for Mac 15 1 Printin g Font Samples You can pr int samples o f fonts that ha ve been downloade d into the m emory. Limita tion ❒ Under Mac OS X, this function is not available. Note ❒ The paper sel ected under [ Page Set up ] is used.
PostS crip t 3 16 1 Mac OS X A On the [ Pri nter Utility for Mac ] menu, click [ Choose Printer... ] . B In th e [ A vailable Networ k Zones: ] list, clic k the zone for the Macinto sh in use. C In the [ Available Printers: ] list, sel ect the printer whose n ame you changed in step B B B B , and then click [ Choose ] .
Printer Utility for Mac 17 1 Selectin g the Zone You can ch ange the zone the machin e belongs to und er Appletalk. Important ❒ Make sure the machine and Macintosh are connected in the Appletalk envi- ronment. A A A A On the [ U tility ] menu, click [ Select Zone.
PostS crip t 3 18 1 Launching t he Dialog Consol e You can create and edit PostScr ipt files for printing and downloading to the ma- chine. Important ❒ Because the “ Launch Di alogue Consol e ” is r ecommended for u sers who have a firm grasp of PostScript, you a re advised to take extreme care when us ing it.
19 INDEX C Collate , 6 D Deleting Fo nts , 14 Disp laying Fon ts , 13 Display ing the Machin e Status , 17 Download ing PostScript Files , 16 Down loadi ng PS Font s , 13 Dupl ex Pr inti ng , 5 E Edge.
20 GB GB EN USA B6 83-8680.
Copyri ght © 2003.
PostSc ript 3 Operati ng Inst ructions Suppl ement GB GB EN USA B683-8680.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book= 80 // Pri nt scale =81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thi ckness / 2 = 3.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book= 80 // Pri nt scale =81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thi ckness / 2 = 3.20 0000 mm In acco rdance wi th IEC 60417, th is machine uses the f ollowi ng symbols for t he main po wer switc h: a a a a mean s P OWE R ON.
i Safety Information When using th is machine, the fol lowing safety precautions shoul d always be fol- lowed. Safety Duri ng Operation In th is manu al, the f ollowing i mportant symbo ls are used : .
ii R CAUT ION: • Protect the machine from dampness or wet wea ther, such as rain and snow. • Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet before you move the machine. While moving the machine, you should take care that the po wer cord will not be damaged under the m achine.
iii Positi ons of Labels and Hallmarks for R R R R WARNING and R R R R CAUTION This mach ine has labels and hallmarks for R WAR NING, R CAUTION at the positions shown below. For safety, please follo w the instructions and handle the mach ine a s i ndicat ed .
iv How to Read this Manual Symb ols In th is manual, the following sym bols are used: R WARNING: This symbol ind icates a potentially hazardous situation that migh t result in death or serious i njury when you misuse the mac hine without following t he in- struc tions under thi s symb ol.
v What You Can Do with This Machine Page36 Page33 Page35 GCFM132N Stel laC1a-EN -CopyF _V4_FM. book P age v Wednes day, Se ptembe r 12, 200 1 4:03 PM.
vi TABLE OF CONTENTS Guid e to C ompon ents .. ...... .... ...... ...... ...... .... ..... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... .... ... 1 Option s ......... .... ...... .... ...... .... ...... ...... .... ...... .... ....... .... ...... .... .....
vii Othe r Functi ons .. ...... .... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ..... .... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ..... 31 User Codes ...... ....... .... ....... ....... ..... ...... ..... ....... .... ....... ....... ..... ....... .... .......
viii 6. Specifi catio ns Mainfr ame. .... ...... .... ...... .... ...... .... ...... .... ...... ...... ..... ...... .... ...... .... ...... .... ...... 6 3 Docu ment Fee der (AD F) (Opt ion) ... ...... ...... ..... .... ...... ...... ...... .... ....
1 Guide to Comp onents 1. Exposur e glass cover Lower the ex posure glass cover over the original placed on the exposure glass f or copyi ng. 2. Document feeder (ADF) (Option) Originals wil l be fed automatical ly. 3. Exposur e glass Pos ition o rigin als h ere fa ce dow n for co pying .
2 8. On indicator This indicator lights up when the opera- tion switch is turned on, and goes off when the switch is turned off. 9. Operation switch Press this switch to turn the power on (the On indicator lights up) . To turn the power off, pr ess this switch a gain (the On indicator g oes off).
3 Optio ns 1. Document f eeder (A DF) Originals wil l be fed automatical ly. Other op tions: • 32MB copier memory unit Increases memory capacity. Stel laC1a-EN -CopyF _V4_FM.
4 Control Panel ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Copi er only ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Fax and/or printer installed 1. Indicators f or fax mode (Fax in- stalled machine only) See the F acsimile Reference manual. 2. { { { { Facsim ile } } } } key (Fax insta lled ma- chine only) Press to use facsimile f unctions.
5 9. { { { { OK } } } } key 10. { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key Pre ss to chang e the def ault setting s an d conditions to meet your requirements. See p.51 “ U ser To ols (C opier Featu res ) ” . 11. { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key While entering numbers, press to cancel a number you have entered.
6 Panel D ispla y The panel display shows the status of the machine, err or messages, and func tion menu s. Important ❒ Do not apply a strong shock or force of about 30N (about 3kgf) or more to the panel display. Otherwise, the display might be damaged.
7 1. Basics Turning On t he Powe r To tu rn the machin e on, pr ess the operatio n switch. Note ❒ This m achin e auto matica lly ente rs Ener gy Save r mode or turns it self of f if you do not use the machine for a w hile. See “ 6. Auto Off Ti mer ” in the System Set- tings manual.
Basics 8 1 Starti ng the Machine A A A A Press the operation switch to make the On indicator go on. The display panel will come on. Note ❒ If the power is not turned on when the op eration switch is pressed, check if the main power switc h is on . If of f, turn it on.
Changing Modes 9 1 Changing Modes You can use this machine not onl y as a copi er, but optionall y as a fax machine or a printer as well . Press the { { { { Copy } } } } key to use copy func tions, or press the { { { { Fac- simil e } } } } key to use facsimile functions.
Basics 10 1 Origina ls Sizes a nd Weights of Recommended Originals ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Metric version ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Inch version Non-recommended origin als for the document feeder (ADF) Placing the followi ng originals in the document fee der (ADF) might cause paper misfeeds or damage to the originals.
Origin als 11 1 Original Siz es and Scanning Area/Mis sing Image Area ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Exposure glass ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Document feeder (ADF) Limitatio n ❒ Even if y ou correc tly plac e origin als in the d ocument feeder (A DF) or on the exposure glass, margins (about 4mm, 0.
Basics 12 1 Copy Paper Recommended Paper Sizes and Ty pes The fol lowin g limi tati ons app ly to each tr ay: *1 Paper wei ght: 80g/m 2 , 20 lb Important ❒ Use of damp or curled paper may cause a misfeed. If a misfeed occurs, try turning over the paper stack in the paper tray.
Copy Paper 13 1 Note ❒ Postcards should be fed from the bypass tray. ❒ When prin ting on envel opes, note the follo wing: • Load th e envelope with the copy si de face dow n on the byp ass tray. • Check that envel ope flap is securely fo lded up.
Basics 14 1 ❒ Do not use en velopes in the follow ing conditions. • damp • excessiv ely curle d or tw isted • stuck together • damaged in any way • with stamps at tached • with windows, .
Toner 15 1 Toner Handling Toner R WARNING: R CAUTIO N: R CAUTIO N: Important ❒ If you use toner o ther than that r ecommended ty pe, a fault might oc cur.
Basics 16 1 Stel laC1a-EN -CopyF _V4_FM. book P age 16 Wednes day, S eptembe r 12, 2001 4: 03 PM.
17 2. Copying Basi c Procedure A A A A Make sure that the machine is in Copy mode . Note ❒ If not, press the { { { { Copy } } } } key. B B B B If the machine is set for User Code, enter the c ode wi th th e number ke ys, and then pre ss the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Copying 18 2 - - - - Auto Off The m achin e turn s itself off au tomat- ically after your job is finished, aft er a certai n period of tim e. This fu nction is called “ Auto Off ” .
Placin g Originals 19 2 Placing Or iginals Limitatio n ❒ Place original s after c orrection f lu- id and ink has completely dried. Not taking this precaution could mark the exposur e glass and caus e mark s to b e copi ed. Note ❒ Basicall y, the origin als should be aligned to the rear left corner.
Copying 20 2 Loading Origin als in the Document Feeder (ADF) Note ❒ The original mi ght become dirty if it is wr itten w ith a penc il or si milar tools . ❒ Do not place any foreign objects on the docu ment feeder (ADF ) or cov- er it with your hand.
Placin g Originals 21 2 C C C C Make sure that "Standard Size" is selected , and t hen pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key . Note ❒ If not, press the 0 or 1 key to sele ct it. D D D D Pre ss th e 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 key to select original size, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Copying 22 2 C C C C Pre ss th e 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 key to select "3. Original Siz e", and t hen pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ You c an also enter this mod e by pressing the { { { { R/# } } } } key. D D D D Pre ss th e 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 key to select "Custom Size", and t hen press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Basic Funct ions 23 2 Basi c Functions Note ❒ You can select functions to be acti- vated when Syst em Re set is tur ned on, when En ergy Saver is turned off, or after t he machine is pow - ered on. See p.54 “ Settings Yo u Can Change with the User Tools ” .
Copying 24 2 Selecting Copy Paper You can ma nually sele ct the paper tray for the pap er size you wi sh to use. A A A A Select t he paper tra y or bypass tray by pressing t he { { { { Select Paper Tray } } } } key.
Sort 25 2 Sor t The optiona l 32MB copi er memory uni t is required to us e this function. The m achine can scan y our orig inals into m emory and automa tically sort the co pies . Limitatio n ❒ The maximu m paper length for the sort fu nction is 356 mm.
Copying 26 2 D D D D Enter the number of copy sets with the numb er keys. Note ❒ The maximu m number of sets is 99. You can change the default numb er with “ 1. Max. Copy Q'ty ” i n the cop ier feat ures . See p.54 “ Settings You Can Change with the User Too ls ” .
Copying f rom the Bypass Tray 27 2 Copying from the By pass Tray Use th e bypass tray to copy ont o OHP transparencies, adhesive l abels, trans- lucent paper , postca rds, e nvelop es, and copy paper that cannot be set in the pap er tra y.
Copying 28 2 Referen ce For deta ils abo ut how to set the copy paper, see p.28 “ When copying onto OHP transparen- cies ” , p.29 “ When copying onto standa rd size pap er ” , p.2 9 “ When copying onto c ustom size co py pa per ” or p.30 “ When copying onto envelope s ” .
Copying f rom the Bypass Tray 29 2 When copying onto standard size pa per Important ❒ You should specify the size of pa- per to avoid paper mis feeds. Note ❒ The de fau lt copy pap er siz e for the pape r tray and the bypass tr ay is A4, 8 1 / 2 " × 11" L A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { R/# } } } } key.
Copying 30 2 D D D D Enter the vertical size of the pape r with the number keys , and then pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ To change the n umber enter ed, press the { { { { Clear/Sto p } } } } key, and then enter the new number.
Othe r F uncti ons 31 2 Other Functions User Codes When user codes are set, operators mus t enter their user codes b efore the machine can be operated.
Copying 32 2 Auto Start If you press the { { { { Sta rt } } } } key during the warm-up p eriod, the { { { { Star t } } } } key will blink and your copies will be made as soon as warm-up finishes. A A A A Make any adjustments to copy settings during the warm-up peri- od.
Preset Redu ce/Enlarge 33 2 Preset Reduce/Enlarge You ca n select a preset r atio for cop y- ing. Note ❒ You can select one of 5 preset r atios (2 enlargement ratios, 3 reduction ratios) . ❒ You can change the pr eset ratios to other rati os you frequently use.
Copying 34 2 D D D D Place your originals, and th en pre ss th e { { { { Start } } } } key. Note ❒ When the copy paper size and the original size dif fer, set the origin al size . See p.2 0 “ Placi ng Standard Size Original s ” Stel laC1a-EN -CopyF _V4_FM.
Zoom 35 2 Zoom You can chan ge the re product ion ra- tio in 1 % step s. Note ❒ You can change the reproduction ratio fro m 50 – 200%. ❒ You can sele ct a ratio r egardless of the size of an original or copy pa- per. With some rati os, par ts of the image might not be c opied or mar- gins will appear on copies.
Copying 36 2 Combi ne Use this feature to c ombine two orig- inal images onto one page. Limitatio n ❒ The machi ne cannot co py original s diff erent in s ize and direc tion. ❒ You cannot use t he bypass tray with th is f unctio n. Note ❒ A5, 5 1 / 2 " × 8 1 / 2 " K copy paper can- not be co mbined.
Combine 37 2 C C C C Sele ct “” with the 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 key, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ You can specify the orientat ion of orig inals.
Copying 38 2 Combination C hart The com bination chart given below shows which mod es can be used together. When you read the char t, please refer to t he following table. The f ollowi ng shows th e combin ation s of functi ons. ✩ means that these modes can be used together .
39 3. Troubleshooting Machine Ope ration Proble ms General Display Machi ne's Condition Problem/Cause Action The machin e instruc ts you to wait. The ma chin e is wa rmin g up. Wai t for the mach ine t o warm- up. Referenc e You can use Auto Start mode d uring the warm-up period.
Troublesh ooting 40 3 Canno t Mak e Cl ear Copi es Pro blem C ause Action Copies appear di rty. The image densit y is too dark. Adjust the image density. See p.23 “ Adjusting Copy Image Densi ty ” . The reverse side of an or iginal image is c opied .
Cannot Mak e Desi red Copi es 41 3 Cannot Mak e Desired C opies Combine Pro blem C ause Action Misfeeds occ ur frequently. Copy paper size setting is not correct . Set the pr oper pap er size. Se e p.47 “ Changing the Paper Size ” or p.27 “ Copying fr om the Bypass Tray ” .
Troublesh ooting 42 3 h h h h Loading Paper Note ❒ If you want to change the paper size, see p.47 “ Changing the Paper Size ” . Referenc e Regarding pape r types and sizes that can be used, see p.12 “ Copy Paper ” . A A A A Make sure that the paper tray is not being used .
h Changing the Tone r Cartridge 43 3 h h h h Changing the Toner Cartridge When h is displa yed, it is time to sup ply tone r. R WARNING: R CAUTIO N: R CAUTIO N: Important ❒ If you use toner o ther than that recom mended, a fault m ight occur. ❒ When adding to ner, do not turn off the power switch.
Troublesh ooting 44 3 • Hold the new toner cartri dge horizontally, and then shake it 5 or 6 times. • Remove the se al. • Insert t he new tone r cartridg e. • Push the new toner cart ridge in unt il it clicks . • Close the front cover of the mac hine.
h Clearing Mis feeds 45 3 h h h h Clearing Misfee ds R CAUTIO N: Important ❒ When cl earing misfeeds, do not turn off th e power sw itch. If you do, your copy settings are cleared. ❒ T o p r e v e n t m i s f e e d s , d o n o t l e a v e a n y t o r n s c r a p s o f p a p e r w i t h i n t h e m a - chi ne.
Troublesh ooting 46 3 Stel laC1a-EN -CopyF _V4_FM. book P age 46 Wednes day, S eptembe r 12, 2001 4: 03 PM.
Changing the Paper Size 47 3 Changing the Pape r Size Important ❒ Select the p aper size with the user tools, or misfeeds might o ccur. Referenc e For paper sizes, weight, and capac- ity that can be loaded in the tray, see p.12 “ Copy P aper ” .
Troublesh ooting 48 3 F F F F Square t he paper and l oad it in the tray . Importa nt ❒ Do not stack paper over the lim- it m ark. G G G G Adjus t the side and back fences to the new pa per size. Importa nt ❒ When setting small quantities of copy paper, be careful not to sque eze in th e side fe nce too much or pa per will not be fed prope rly.
Changing the Paper Size 49 3 E E E E If you have selecte d "3. Bypa ss" on step D D D D , select "Standard Size" or "Custom Size", and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Troublesh ooting 50 3 Stel laC1a-EN -CopyF _V4_FM. book P age 50 Wednes day, S eptembe r 12, 2001 4: 03 PM.
51 4. User Tools (Copier Features) Accessi ng the User Tool s (Copier Features) This sect ion is for th e key operator s in charge o f this ma chine. Th e user to ols allow you to change or set th e ma- chine's d efault settings. Prep arat ion Always exit the user tool s when you have finished.
User Tools (Co pier Featur es) 52 4 Exitin g the User Tools A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. Note ❒ You can exit th e User Tools mode by pressing the { { { { Cancel } } } } key. ❒ If you wa nt to retur n to the pr e- vious mode, press the { { { { User Tools/Counte r } } } } key.
User To ols Menu (Copier Featu res) 53 4 User To ols Menu (Copie r Features) Stel laC1a-EN -CopyF _V4_FM. book P age 53 Wednes day, S eptembe r 12, 2001 4: 03 PM.
User Tools (Co pier Featur es) 54 4 Settings You C an Change wit h the User Tools Referenc e For de tails abo ut how to ac cess the us er tools, see p.51 “ Acce ssing the User Tools ( Copier Features) ” . Copier F eatures Menu Des cription 1. Maximum Copy Quan- tity (1.
Settings You Can Chan ge with the User Tools 55 4 3. Set Ratio Select which Reduce, Enlarge or Input Ratio is shown on the panel display with prio rity when the { { { { Reduce/Enlarge } } } } key is p ressed.
User Tools (Co pier Featur es) 56 4 5. Clear all User Codes (5. Clr All User C odes) You c an clea r all us er cod es. Note ❒ The number of copies made under the old code is added to that made under the ne w user code. ❒ The number of c opies made under the deleted code is also de- leted .
57 5. Remarks Do's and Don'ts R CAUTIO N: Important ❒ Make sure the remaining memory space is 100%, before you unplug the pow- er cord. ❒ While the machine is unplugged, you can neither send nor receive a fax. Referenc e For details, see the Facsimile Reference manual.
Remarks 58 5 Where to P ut Your Machine Machi ne En viron ment Your machin e's location should be carefully chosen because environment al con- diti ons g reat ly aff ect its pe rfor manc e. Optimum environm ental conditions R CAUTIO N: R CAUTIO N: • Temperature: 10 – 32 ° C (50 – 89.
Where to Put Your Machine 59 5 Power Connect ion R WARNING: R WARNING: R CAUTIO N: • When th e main switch is in the Sta nd-by posi tion, the opti onal anti-c onden- sation heaters are on. In c ase of emergency, un plug the machine's p ower cord.
Remarks 60 5 Access t o Machine Place the machine near the power source, provi ding clearance as shown. 1. Rear : mor e than 1c m (0.4 ") 2. Right: more than 1cm (0.
Mainta ining Your Machin e 61 5 Maintaining Yo ur Machine If the exposure glass, ex posure glass cover or docume nt feeder (ADF) white sheet is dirty , clean t hem if you find them dirty. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Cleani ng the machine Wipe the machine with a soft, damp cloth.
Remarks 62 5 Stel laC1a-EN -CopyF _V4_FM. book P age 62 Wednes day, S eptembe r 12, 2001 4: 03 PM.
63 6. Specifications Mainframe ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Confi gura tion: Desktop ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Photosensitivity type: OPC drum ( Φ 30) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Original s canning: One-dimensional solid scanning syst.
Specificat ions 64 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Copy pape r weigh t: • Paper tray (Standard size): 60 – 90g/m 2 (16 – 24 lb.) • Bypass tray: 60 – 1 57g/m 2 (16 – 42 lb.) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Non-repr oduction area: • Leading edge: 3 ± 2 mm, 0.14" ± 0.
Mai nfr ame 65 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Dimensi ons (W × × × × D × × × × H up to exposure glass): 468 × 450 × 371mm (18. 43 × 17.72 × 14.61 inch ) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Noise Emission *1 : • Sound p ower le vel • Sound pressur e level *2 *1 The abov e measure ments ma de in accordan ce with ISO 777 9 are actual value.
Specificat ions 66 6 Docume nt Feeder (ADF) (Opt ion) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Mode : • ADF mode ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Origin al size: • A4 L – A5 KL • 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L – 5 1 / 2 " × 8 1 / 2 " KL ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Orig inal wei ght: • 1-s ided or igina ls: 52 – 105g/m 2 (14 – 28 lb.
32MB Copier Memor y Unit (Option ) 67 6 32MB Copie r Memory Unit (Optio n) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Memory capacity: 32MB ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Additional function s: Increas ed me mory ca pacity ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Number of o riginals that can b e stored: abo ut 99 pages ITU-T No.
68 INDEX 32MB Cop ier Memo ry Un it , 3 , 67 A Access to Machine , 60 Adju stin g C opy Im age Den sity , 23 Adjust Orig inal Mode , 54 Auto Off , 18 Auto Start , 32 B Basic Functions , 23 Bypas s Pap.
69 T Toner , 15 U User Cod es , 31 User Tools , 51 V Ventil ation hole , 1 Z Zoom , 35 Stel laC1a-EN -CopyF _V4_FM. book P age 69 Wednes day, S eptembe r 12, 2001 4: 03 PM.
70 MEMO Stel laC1a-EN -CopyF _V4_FM. book P age 70 Wednes day, S eptembe r 12, 2001 4: 03 PM.
71 MEMO Stel laC1a-EN -CopyF _V4_FM. book P age 71 Wednes day, S eptembe r 12, 2001 4: 03 PM.
72 UE US A B04 5 MEMO Stel laC1a-EN -CopyF _V4_FM. book P age 72 Wednes day, S eptembe r 12, 2001 4: 03 PM.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book= 20 // Pri nt scale =81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Paper thi ckness / 2 = 0 mm Operat ing Instr uctions System Settings For safet y, please read this manual care fully before you use this prod uct and keep it handy for future reference.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book= 20 // Pri nt scale =81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Paper thi ckness / 2 = 0 mm Note to use.
i ENER GY ST AR Pr ogra m •L o w P o w e r m o d e This product automatic ally lowers its power co nsumption 15 minutes after the last copy or print job has fi nished. Fax reception and printing is stil l pos- sible in Low Power mode, but if you wish to make copies press th e operation switch f irst.
ii Specification Recycled Paper In acco rdance wi th the ENERGY S TAR Program , we recom mend use of recy cled paper which i s environmentally friendly.
iii How to Read this Manual Symb ols In th is manual, the following sym bols are used: R WARNING: This symbol ind icates a potentially hazardous situation that migh t result in death or serious i njury when you misuse the mac hine without following t he in- struc tions under thi s symb ol.
iv TABLE OF CONTENTS Manu als f or Thi s Mac hine ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ..... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ... 1 Addit iona l Funct ions Provi ded b y Inter nal O ptions ... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... . 2 Copy Mod e ..
1 Manuals f or This M achine Thi s is a mu lti-f unct ional ma chine comb ining c opier , printe r and fax fu nctions . A separate manual is provided for each funct ion. Please consult the manual that suits your needs. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ System Settings Provides an overview of the machine.
2 Additional Functio ns Provided by Internal Optio ns You can expand the capabili ties of this machine to include fax functions and printer func tions.
3 1. Modes Changing Modes Pre ss the { { { { Copy } } } } , { { { { Facsimile } } } } or { { { { Printer } } } } key to s witch to copy, fax or print er mode r espe ct ively . Limitatio n ❒ You cannot sw itch modes in any of th e following cases: • When scanning in a fax m essage for transmission.
Modes 4 1 Mult i-access You can carry out another job using a different function while the current job is being performe d. This allows y ou to handle your jo bs efficiently regardless of how the machine is being used. For example: • While making copies, the machi ne can send a fax message that has been stored in memory .
Multi-acce ss 5 1 ✩ … means that these func tions can be used togeth er. ❍ … means that you can interrupt the current job with function keys to proceed to a subsequent job. → … means th at anoth er job w ill auto matically st art afte r the cur rent job is fin- ished.
Modes 6 1 Copy Mode Changing to Copy Mode You can always make a copy when the machine is not printing or scan- ning fax data. A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { Copy } } } } key. The copy display appea rs on the panel display. Referen ce For details, see the Copy Refer- ence m anual.
Facsi mile Mo de 7 1 Facsimile M ode Changing t o Facsimile Mode You ca n always use the machine fo r faxing when you are not using the scanner function. A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { Facsimi le } } } } key. The fa x disp lay appe ars on t he panel display.
Modes 8 1 Printer Mo de Changing t o Printer Mode Whenever you print fr om applica- tions, you do not have to sw itch to Printer mode. Referenc e For details, see t he Printer Refer- ence ma nual. Prin ti ng The machine can receive a print data while another feature is running.
9 2. User Tools (System Settings) Keys for User T ools (System Set tings) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When the machine has the copier feature only ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When the machine has the printer and/or fax feature 1. { { { { Cancel } } } } key Press to return to the previous menu .
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 10 2 7. { { { { Clear Modes } } } } key Press to clear th e previously entered copy job settings. 8. { { { { Facsimile } } } } key (Fax installed ma- chine only) Press to use facsimile f unctions. 9. { { { { Copy } } } } key Press to use copy functions.
Accessi ng the User Tool s (System Set tings) 11 2 Accessi ng the User Tools (System Sett ings) This sect ion is for th e key operator s in charge of this machine. You can change or set th e machine's def ault settings . Prep arat ion After u sing the user tool s, be s ure to retu rn to C opy mo de.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 12 2 C C C C Pre ss th e 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 key until your desi red m enu is disp laye d, an d then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ 1 : Press to go to the next menu. ❒ 0 : Press to go back to the previ- ous menu .
User Tool s Menu (System Set tings) 13 2 User T ools Me nu (Sys tem Sett ings) Stell aC1a-EN -SysF_V 4_FM.b ook Pag e 13 W ednesda y, Sep tember 12, 20 01 4:16 P M.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 14 2 Settings You C an Change wit h the User Tools Referenc e For details abo ut how to access the user tools, see p.13 “ User Tools Menu (System S ettings) ” .
Settings You Can Chan ge with the User Tools 15 2 5. Energ y Saver Level You can sel ect the Energy Save r level. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Level 1 • Power Cons umption: Reduced by about 5% compared to standby mode. • Warm-Up Time: about 5 seconds ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Level 2 • Power Cons umption: Reduced by about 40% compared to standby mode.
16 UE US A B04 5 INDEX A AOF(Keep It On.) , 15 Auto Off Timer , 15 C Clear Mo des ke y , 10 Clear/S top key , 9 Contra st , 15 Copy Coun t Display , 14 Copy Mod e , 2 , 6 Curs or keys , 9 E Energy Sav.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book= 84 // Pri nt scale =81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thi ckness / 2 = 3.36 0000 mm Operati ng Instruct ions Copy Refer ence Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it h andy for future referenc e.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book= 84 // Pri nt scale =81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thi ckness / 2 = 3.360000 mm In acco rdance w ith IEC 6041 7, th is machine uses the follow ing symbol s for t he main po wer swit ch: a a a a means POWER ON.
i Safety Information When using your equip ment, the following safety precaution s should always be followed. Safety Duri ng Operation In th is manu al, the f ollowing i mportant symbo ls are used : R WARNIN G: R WARNING: Indicates a potentially h azardous situation w hich, if instru ctions are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.
ii R CAUT ION: • Protect the equipment from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow, and so on. • Unplug the power cord from the wal l outlet before you move the equipment. While moving the equipment, you should take care that the power cord will not be damaged under the equipment.
iii Positi ons of Labels and Hallmarks for R R R R WARNIN G and R R R R CAUT ION This mach ine has labels and hallmarks for R WAR NING, R CAUTION at the positions shown below. For safety, please follo w the instructions and handle the mach ine a s i ndicat ed .
iv How to Read this Manual Symb ols In th is manual, the following sym bols are used: R WARNING: This symbol ind icates a potentially hazardous situation that migh t result in death or serious i njury when you misuse the mac hine without following t he in- struc tions under thi s symb ol.
v Machi ne Types This machin e has two m odels. Typ e 2 machine i s instal led with t he fax uni t as a standard. Type 1 T ype 2 Fax unit Option Stan dard Printer unit Option O ption Stell aC-EN-C opyF_V 4_FM.
vi What You Can Do with This Machine Stel laC-EN-C opyF_V 4_FM.bo ok Pa ge vi We dnesday , July 4, 20 01 11 :23 AM.
vii TABLE OF CONTENTS Guid e to C ompon ents .. ...... .... ...... ...... ...... .... ..... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... .... ... 1 Option s ......... .... ...... .... ...... .... ...... ...... .... ...... .... ....... .... ...... .... ....
viii Othe r Functi ons .. ...... .... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ..... .... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ..... 31 User Codes ...... ....... .... ....... ....... ..... ...... ..... ....... .... ....... ....... ..... ....... .... ......
ix 6. Specifi catio ns Mainfr ame. .... ...... .... ...... .... ...... .... ...... .... ...... ...... ..... ...... .... ...... .... ...... .... ...... 6 5 Docu ment Fee der (AD F) (Optio n for Ty pe 1) . ..... .... ...... ...... ...... ...... .... ...
x Stell aC-EN-C opyF_V 4_FM.bo ok Pa ge x We dnesda y, July 4, 2001 11:23 AM.
1 Guide to Comp onents 1. Exposur e glass cover Lower the ex posure glass cover over the original placed on the exposure glass f or copyi ng. 2. Document feeder (ADF) (Option for Ty pe 1) Originals wil l be fed automatical ly. 3. Exposur e glass Pos ition o rigin als h ere fa ce dow n for co pying .
2 8. On indicator This indicator lights up when the opera- tion switch is turned on, and goes off when the switch is turned off. 9. Operation switch Press this switch to turn the power on (the On indicator lights up) . To turn the power off, pr ess this switch a gain (the On indicator g oes off).
3 Optio ns 1. Document feeder (ADF) (Option for Ty pe 1) Originals wil l be fed automatical ly. 2. Pape r tra y uni t Holds 500 sheets of paper. Other op tions: • 32MB copier memory unit Increases memory capacity.
4 Control Panel ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Copi er only ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Fax and/or printer installed 1. Indicators f or fax mode (Fax in- stalled machine only) See the F acsimile Reference manual. 2. { { { { Facsim ile } } } } key (Fax insta lled ma- chine only) Press to use facsimile f unctions.
5 11. { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key While entering numbers, press to cancel a number you have entered. While copy- ing, press to stop copying. 12. { { { { Clear Modes } } } } key Press to clear th e previously entered copy job settings.
6 Panel D ispla y The panel display shows the status of the machine, err or messages, and func tion menu s. Important ❒ Do not apply a strong shock or force of about 30N (about 3kgf) or more to the panel display. Otherwise, the display might be damaged.
7 1. Basics Turning On t he Powe r To tu rn the machin e on, pr ess the operatio n switch. Note ❒ This m achin e auto matica lly ente rs Ener gy Save r mode or turns it self of f if you do not use the machine for a w hile. See “ 6. Auto Off Ti mer ” in the System Set- tings manual.
Basics 8 1 Starti ng the Machine A A A A Press the operation switch to make the On indicator go on. The display panel will come on. Note ❒ If the power is not turned on when the op eration switch is pressed, check if the main power switc h is on . If of f, turn it on.
Changing Modes 9 1 Changing Modes You can use this machine not onl y as a copi er, but optionall y as a fax machine or a printer as well. (T ype 2 machine is installe d with t he fax function as the stan- dard.) Press the { { { { Copy } } } } key to use copy functions, or press the { { { { Facsimile } } } } key to use facsim ile fu nctio ns.
Basics 10 1 Origina ls Sizes a nd Weights of Recommended Originals ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Metric version ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Inch version Non-recommended origin als for the document feeder (ADF) Placing the followi ng originals in the document fee der (ADF) might cause paper misfeeds or damage to the originals.
Origin als 11 1 Original Siz es and Scanning Area/Mis sing Image Area ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Exposure glass ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Document feeder (ADF) Limitatio n ❒ Even if y ou correc tly plac e origin als in the d ocument feeder (A DF) or on the exposure glass, margins (about 4mm, 0.
Basics 12 1 Copy Paper Recommended Paper Sizes and Ty pes The fol lowin g limi tati ons app ly to each tr ay: *1 Paper wei ght: 80g/m 2 , 20 lb *2 Place one sheet at a time.
Copy Paper 13 1 Important ❒ Use of damp or curled paper may cause a misfeed. If a misfeed occurs, try turning over the paper stack in the paper tray. If there is no improvement, change to copy pap er with l ess cur l. Note ❒ Postcards should be fed from the bypass tray.
Basics 14 1 Note ❒ Do not use any of the following kinds of paper o r a misfeed mi ght occur. • Bent, fo lded, or c reased paper • Damp paper • Torn pa per • Slippe ry paper • Perforated p.
Toner 15 1 Toner Handling Toner R WARNING: R CAUTIO N: R CAUTIO N: Important ❒ If you use toner o ther than that r ecommended ty pe, a fault might oc cur.
Basics 16 1 Stel laC-EN -CopyF _V4_FM. book P age 16 Wednes day, Ju ly 4, 2 001 1 1:23 AM.
17 2. Copying Basi c Procedure A A A A Make sure that the machine is in Copy mode . Note ❒ If not, press the { { { { Copy } } } } key. B B B B If the machine is set for User Code, enter the c ode wi th th e number ke ys, and then pre ss the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Copying 18 2 - - - - Auto Off The m achin e turn s itself off au tomat- ically after your job is finished, aft er a certai n period of tim e. This fu nction is called “ Auto Off ” .
Placin g Originals 19 2 Placing Or iginals Limitatio n ❒ Place original s after c orrection f lu- id and ink has completely dried. Not taking this precaution could mark the exposur e glass and caus e mark s to b e copi ed. Note ❒ Basicall y, the origin als should be aligned to the rear left corner.
Copying 20 2 Loading Origin als in the Document Feeder (ADF) Note ❒ The original mi ght become dirty if it is wr itten w ith a penc il or si milar tools . ❒ Do not place any foreign objects on the docu ment feeder (ADF ) or cov- er it with your hand.
Placin g Originals 21 2 C C C C Make sure that "Standard Size" is selected , and t hen pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key . Note ❒ If not, press the 0 or 1 key to sele ct it. D D D D Pre ss th e 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 key to select original size, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Copying 22 2 C C C C Pre ss th e 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 key to select "3. Original Siz e", and t hen pres s the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ You c an also enter this mod e by pressing the { { { { R/# } } } } key. D D D D Pre ss th e 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 key to select "Custom Size", and t hen press the { { { { OK } } } } key.
Basic Funct ions 23 2 Basi c Functions Note ❒ You can select functions to be acti- vated when Syst em Re set is tur ned on, when En ergy Saver is turned off, or after t he machine is pow - ered on. See p.56 “ Settings Yo u Can Change with the User Tools ” .
Copying 24 2 Selecting Copy Paper You can ma nually sele ct the paper tray for the pap er size you wi sh to use. A A A A Select t he paper tra y or bypass tray by pressing t he { { { { Select Paper Tray } } } } key.
Sort 25 2 Sor t The optiona l 32MB copi er memory uni t is required to us e this function. The m achine can scan y our orig inals into m emory and automa tically sort the co pies . Limitatio n ❒ The maximu m paper length for the sort fu nction is 356 mm.
Copying 26 2 D D D D Enter the number of copy sets with the numb er keys. Note ❒ The maximu m number of sets is 99. You can change the default numb er with “ 1. Max. Copy Q'ty ” i n the cop ier feat ures . See p.56 “ Settings You Can Change with the User Too ls ” .
Copying f rom the Bypass Tray 27 2 Copying from the By pass Tray Use th e bypass tray to copy ont o OHP transparencies, adhesive l abels, trans- lucent paper , postca rds, e nvelop es, and copy paper that cannot be set in the pap er tra y.
Copying 28 2 Note ❒ Set the dir ection of the co py pa- per to L . ❒ Swing out the exten der to sup- port pap er sizes la rger than A4 L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L . ❒ Fan paper to get air between the sheets and avoid a multi-sheet feed. Referen ce For deta ils abo ut how to set the copy paper, see p.
Copying f rom the Bypass Tray 29 2 F F F F Gently insert the OH P transpar- encies face down and adjust the pape r gui de. Importa nt ❒ The side of OHP transparencies t h a t i s c o p i e d i s f i x e d . B e f o r e you place the OHP transparen- cies in the byp ass tray, c heck the cutting position of the OHP transparencies.
Copying 30 2 C C C C Enter the horizontal size of the pape r wit h the nu mber keys , and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ To change the n umber enter ed, press the { { { { Clear/Sto p } } } } key, and then enter the new number.
Othe r F uncti ons 31 2 Other Functions User Codes When user codes are set, operators mus t enter their user codes b efore the machine can be operated.
Copying 32 2 Preset Reduce/Enlarge You ca n select a preset r atio for cop y- ing. Note ❒ You can select one of 5 preset r atios (2 enlargement ratios, 3 reduction ratios) . ❒ You can change the pr eset ratios to other rati os you frequently use. See “ 3.
Preset Redu ce/Enlarge 33 2 D D D D Place your originals, and th en pre ss th e { { { { Start } } } } key. Note ❒ When the copy paper size and the original size dif fer, set the origin al size . See p.2 0 “ Placi ng Standard Size Original s ” Stel laC-EN -CopyF _V4_FM.
Copying 34 2 Zoom You can chan ge the re product ion ra- tio in 1 % step s. Note ❒ You can change the reproduction ratio fro m 50 – 200%. ❒ You can sele ct a ratio r egardless of the size of an original or copy pa- per. With some rati os, par ts of the image might not be c opied or mar- gins will appear on copies.
Combine 35 2 Combi ne Use this feature to c ombine two orig- inal images onto one page. Limitatio n ❒ The machi ne cannot co py original s diff erent in s ize and direc tion. Note ❒ A5, 5 1 / 2 " × 8 1 / 2 " K copy paper can- not be co mbined.
Copying 36 2 C C C C Sele ct “” with the 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 key, and then press the { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ You can specify the orientat ion of orig inals.
Combinat ion Chart 37 2 Combination C hart The com bination chart given below shows which mod es can be used together. When you read the char t, please refer to t he following table. The f ollowi ng shows th e combin ation s of functi ons. ✩ means that these modes can be used toge ther.
Copying 38 2 Stel laC-EN -CopyF _V4_FM. book P age 38 Wednes day, Ju ly 4, 2 001 1 1:23 AM.
39 3. Troubleshooting Machine Ope ration Proble ms General Display Machi ne's Condition Problem/Cause Action The machin e instruc ts you to wait. The ma chin e is wa rmin g up. Wai t for the mach ine t o warm- up. Referenc e You can use Auto Start mode d uring the warm-up period.
Troublesh ooting 40 3 Canno t Mak e Cl ear Copi es Pro blem C ause Action Copies appear di rty. The image densit y is too dark. Adjust the image density. See p.23 “ Adjusting Copy Image Densi ty ” . The reverse side of an or iginal image is c opied .
Cannot Mak e Desi red Copi es 41 3 Cannot Mak e Desired C opies Combine Pro blem C ause Action Misfeeds occ ur frequently. Copy paper size setting is not correct . Set the pr oper pap er size. Se e p.48 “ Changing the Paper Size ” or p.27 “ Copying fr om the Bypass Tray ” .
Troublesh ooting 42 3 h h h h Loading Paper Note ❒ If you want to change the paper size, see p.48 “ Changing the Paper Size ” . Referenc e Regarding pape r types and sizes that can be used, see p.12 “ Copy Paper ” . A A A A Make sure that the paper tray is not being used .
h Loading Paper 43 3 Note ❒ Shuffle the paper before loadin g it in the tray . ❒ If the paper i s curl ed, load t he paper up side do wn. E E E E Readjust the back fen ce and side fences.
Troublesh ooting 44 3 h h h h Changing the Toner Cartridge When h is displa yed, it is time to sup ply tone r. R WARNING: R CAUTIO N: R CAUTIO N: Important ❒ If you use toner o ther than that recom mended, a fault m ight occur. ❒ When adding to ner, do not turn off the power switch.
h Changing the Tone r Cartridge 45 3 • Press the Toner Cartri dge backwar d to raise its head, and then gently pull out the bottle. • Hold the ne w bottle horizontally, an d then shake it 5 or 6 times. Note ❒ Do not remove the bl ack cap when shak ing .
Troublesh ooting 46 3 h h h h Clearing Misfee ds R CAUTIO N: Important ❒ When cl earing misfeeds, do not turn off th e power sw itch. If you do, your copy settings are cleared. ❒ T o p r e v e n t m i s f e e d s , d o n o t l e a v e a n y t o r n s c r a p s o f p a p e r w i t h i n t h e m a - chi ne.
h Clearing Mis feeds 47 3 Stel laC-EN -CopyF _V4_FM. book P age 47 Wednes day, Ju ly 4, 2 001 1 1:23 AM.
Troublesh ooting 48 3 Changing the Pape r Size Important ❒ Select the p aper size with the user tools, or misfeeds might o ccur. Referenc e For paper sizes, weight, and capac- ity that can be loaded in each tray, see p.12 “ Copy P aper ” . Changin g the Paper Size in t he Paper Tray A A A A Make sure that the paper tray is not being used .
Changing the Paper Size 49 3 F F F F Square t he paper and l oad it in the tray . Importa nt ❒ Do not stack paper over the lim- it m ark. G G G G Adjus t the side and back fences to the new pa per size.
Troublesh ooting 50 3 D D D D While pressing the relea se lever, adjust the side fences . E E E E Push the met al pla te down, and then square the paper and load it in the tray. Importa nt ❒ Do not stack paper over the lim- it m ark. ❒ Load paper so that the paper touche s the right side of the tray, or misfeeds might occur.
Changing the Paper Size 51 3 Sele cting the Paper Size with the User Tools A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. B B B B Pres s th e 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 key to display "2.Syste m Settings", and then pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Troublesh ooting 52 3 Stel laC-EN -CopyF _V4_FM. book P age 52 Wednes day, Ju ly 4, 2 001 1 1:23 AM.
53 4. User Tools (Copier Features) Accessi ng the User Tool s (Copier Features) This sect ion is for th e key operator s in charge o f this ma chine. Th e user to ols allow you to change or set th e ma- chine's d efault settings. Prep arat ion Always exit the user tool s when you have finished.
User Tools (Co pier Featur es) 54 4 Exitin g the User Tools A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User Tools/ Counter } } } } key. Note ❒ You can exit th e User Tools mode by pressing the { { { { Cancel } } } } key. ❒ If you wa nt to retur n to the pr e- viou s mod e (c opy or fac simil e), press the { { { { User Tools /Counter } } } } key.
User To ols Menu (Copier Featu res) 55 4 User To ols Menu (Copie r Features) Stel laC-EN -CopyF _V4_FM. book P age 55 Wednes day, Ju ly 4, 2 001 1 1:23 AM.
User Tools (Co pier Featur es) 56 4 Settings You C an Change wit h the User Tools Referenc e For de tails abo ut how to ac cess the us er tools, see p.53 “ Acce ssing the User Tools ( Copier Features) ” . Copier F eatures Menu Des cription 1. Maximum Copy Quan- tity (1.
Settings You Can Chan ge with the User Tools 57 4 3. Set Ratio Select which Reduce, Enlarge or Input Ratio is shown on the panel display with prio rity when the { { { { Reduce/Enlarge } } } } key is p ressed.
User Tools (Co pier Featur es) 58 4 5. Clear all User Codes (5. Clr All User C odes) You c an clea r all us er cod es. Note ❒ The number of copies made under the old code is added to that made under the ne w user code. ❒ The number of c opies made under the deleted code is also de- leted .
59 5. Remarks Do's and Don'ts R CAUTIO N: Important ❒ Make sure the remaining memory space is 100%, before you unplug the pow- er cord. ❒ While the machine is unplugged, you can neither send nor receive a fax. Referenc e For details, see the Facsimile Reference manual.
Remarks 60 5 Where to P ut Your Machine Machi ne En viron ment Your machin e's location should be carefully chosen because environment al con- diti ons g reat ly aff ect its pe rfor manc e. Optimum environm ental conditions R CAUTIO N: R CAUTIO N: R CAUTIO N: • Temperature: 10 – 32 ° C (50 – 89.
Where to Put Your Machine 61 5 Power Connect ion R WARNING: R WARNING: R CAUTIO N: • When th e main switch is in the Sta nd-by posi tion, the opti onal anti-c onden- sation heaters are on. In c ase of emergency, un plug the machine's p ower cord.
Remarks 62 5 Access t o Machine Place the machine near the power source, provi ding clearance as shown. 1. Rear : mor e than 1c m (0.4 ") 2. Right: more than 1cm (0.
Mainta ining Your Machin e 63 5 Maintaining Yo ur Machine If the exposure glass, ex posure glass cover or docume nt feeder (ADF) white sheet is dirty , clean t hem if you find them dirty. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Cleani ng the machine Wipe the machine with a soft, damp cloth.
Remarks 64 5 Stel laC-EN -CopyF _V4_FM. book P age 64 Wednes day, Ju ly 4, 2 001 1 1:23 AM.
65 6. Specifications Mainframe ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Confi gura tion: Desktop ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Photosensitivity type: OPC drum ( Φ 30) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Original s canning: One-dimensional solid scanning syst.
Specificat ions 66 6 • Bypass tray (cus tom size ): Vertical : 90 – 216mm, 3.5" – 8.5" Horizontal: 140 – 3 56mm, 5 .5" – 14" • Paper tra y unit: A4 L , 8 1 / 2 " .
Mai nfr ame 67 6 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Power co nsumptio n: *1 Mainframe with the optional doc ument feeder (ADF), paper tray unit. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Dimensi ons (W × × × × D × × × × H up to exposure glass): • Type 1: 468 × 450 × 371mm (18.43 × 17.
Specificat ions 68 6 Document Feeder (ADF) (Option for Type 1) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Mode : • ADF mode ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Origin al size: • A4 L – A5 KL • 8 1 / 2 " × 14" L – 5 1 / 2 " × 8 1 / 2 " KL ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Orig inal wei ght: • 1-s ided or igina ls: 52 – 105g/m 2 (14 – 28 lb.
Paper Tray Uni t (Option ) 69 6 Paper Tray U nit (Option) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Copy pape r weigh t: 60 – 90g/m 2 (16 – 24 lb .) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Available paper size: A4 L , 8 1 / 2 " × 14 " .
Specificat ions 70 6 32MB Copie r Memory Unit (Optio n) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Memory capacity: 32MB ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Additional function s: Increas ed me mory ca pacity ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Number of o riginals that can b e stored: abo ut 99 pages ITU-T No.4 cha rt Stel laC-EN -CopyF _V4_FM.
71 INDEX 32MB Cop ier Memo ry Un it , 3 , 70 A Access to Machine , 62 Adju stin g C opy Im age Den sity , 23 Adjust Orig inal Mode , 56 Auto Off , 18 Auto Start , 31 B Basic Functions , 23 Bypas s Pap.
72 T Toner , 15 U User Cod es , 31 User Tools , 53 V Ventil ation hole , 1 Z Zoom , 34 Stel laC-EN -CopyF _V4_FM. book P age 72 Wednes day, Ju ly 4, 2 001 1 1:23 AM.
73 MEMO Stel laC-EN -CopyF _V4_FM. book P age 73 Wednes day, Ju ly 4, 2 001 1 1:23 AM.
74 UE US A B04 5 MEMO Stel laC-EN -CopyF _V4_FM. book P age 74 Wednes day, Ju ly 4, 2 001 1 1:23 AM.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book= 24 // Pri nt scale =81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Paper thi ckness / 2 = 0 mm Operat ing Instr uctions System Settings Read th is manua l careful ly before you us e this p roduct and keep it handy f or futur e referenc e.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book= 24 // Pri nt scale =81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Paper thi ckness / 2 = 0 mm Note to use.
i ENER GY ST AR Pr ogra m •L o w P o w e r m o d e This product automatic ally lowers its power co nsumption 15 minutes after the last copy or print job has fi nished. Fax reception and printing is stil l pos- sible in Low Power mode, but if you wish to make copies press th e operation switch f irst.
ii Specification Recycled Paper In acco rdance wi th the ENERGY S TAR Program , we recom mend use of recy cled pape r which is environmen t friendly. Please c ontact your sales represen tative for re comm ended pa per.
iii How to Read this Manual Symb ols In th is manual, the following sym bols are used: R WARNING: This symbol ind icates a potentially hazardous situation that migh t result in death or serious i njury when you misuse the mac hine without following t he in- struc tions under thi s symb ol.
iv TABLE OF CONTENTS Manu als f or Thi s Mac hine ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ..... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ... 1 Machi ne Typ es .... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ..... .... ...... ...... ...... .... .
1 Manuals f or This M achine Thi s is a mu lti-f unct ional ma chine comb ining c opier , printe r and fax fu nctions . A separate manual is provided for each funct ion. Please consult the manual that suits your needs. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ System Settings Provides an overview of the machine.
2 Machi ne Types This machin e has two m odels. Typ e 2 machine i s instal led with t he fax uni t as a standard. Type 1 T ype 2 Fax unit Option Stan dard Printer unit Option O ption Stell a-EN -SysF_ V4_FM .
3 Additional Functio ns Provided by Internal Optio ns You can expand the capabili ties of this machine to include fax functions and printer func tions.
4 Stell a-EN -SysF_ V4_FM .boo k Page 4 Wednesd ay, Ju ly 4, 20 01 1:2 9 PM.
5 1. Modes Changing Modes Pre ss the { { { { Copy } } } } , { { { { Facsimile } } } } or { { { { Printer } } } } key to s witch to copy, fax or print er mode r espe ct ively . Limitatio n ❒ You cannot sw itch modes in any of th e following cases: • When scanning in a fax m essage for transmission.
Modes 6 1 Mult i-access You can carry out another job using a different function while the current job is being performe d. This allows y ou to handle your jo bs efficiently regardless of how the machine is being used. For example: • While making copies, the machi ne can send a fax message that has been stored in memory .
Multi-acce ss 7 1 ✩ … means that these func tions can be used togeth er. ❍ … means that you can interrupt the current job with function keys to proceed to a subsequent job. → … means th at anoth er job w ill auto matically st art afte r the cur rent job is fin- ished.
Modes 8 1 Copy Mode Changing to Copy Mode You can always make a copy when the machine is not printing or scan- ning fax data. A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { Copy } } } } key. The copy display appea rs on the panel display. Referen ce For details, see the Copy Refer- ence m anual.
Facsi mile Mo de 9 1 Facsimile M ode Changing t o Facsimile Mode You ca n always use the machine fo r faxing when you are not using the scanner function. A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { Facsimi le } } } } key. The fa x disp lay appe ars on t he panel display.
Modes 10 1 Printer Mo de Changing t o Printer Mode Whenever you print fr om applica- tions, you do not have to sw itch to Printer mode. Referenc e For details, see t he Printer Refer- ence ma nual. Prin ti ng The machine can receive a print data while another feature is running.
11 2. User Tools (System Settings) Keys for User T ools (System Set tings) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When the machine has the copier feature only ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ When the machine has the printer and/or fax feature 1. { { { { Cancel } } } } key Press to return to the previous menu .
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 12 2 9. { { { { Copy } } } } key Press to use copy functions. 10. { { { { Printer } } } } key (Printer installed machine only) Press to use printer functions. 11. Numbe r k eys Use to enter a numeric value. 12. { { { { Start } } } } key Press to start copying o r faxing.
Accessi ng the User Tool s (System Set tings) 13 2 Accessi ng the User Tools (System Sett ings) This sect ion is for th e key operator s in charge of this machine. You can change or set th e machine's def ault settings . Prep arat ion After u sing the user tool s, be s ure to retu rn to C opy mo de.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 14 2 *1 *1 Displays when the optional paper t r a y u n i t i s e q u i p p e d w i t h y o u r machine. Note ❒ 1 : Press to go to the next menu.
User Tool s Menu (System Set tings) 15 2 User T ools Me nu (Sys tem Sett ings) *1 Displays when the optional paper tray unit is equipped with your mach ine.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 16 2 Settings Yo u Can Change with the U ser Tools Referenc e For details abo ut how to access the user tools, see p.15 “ User Tools Menu (System S ettings) ” .
Settings You Can Chan ge with the User Tools 17 2 5. Energ y Saver Level You can sel ect the Energy Save r level. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Level 1 • Power Cons umption: Reduced by about 5% compared to standby mode. • Warm-Up Time: about 5 seconds ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Level 2 • Power Cons umption: Reduced by about 40% compared to standby mode.
User Tool s (Syst em Setti ngs) 18 2 9. Pap.Tray P riority (for Copy mode only) When the opt ional pap er tray unit is equ ipped with you r machin e, you c an se lect a defa ult pap er tr ay in the fol lowin g co nditio ns: • When the operation switch is turne d on.
19 INDEX A AOF(Keep It On.) , 17 Auto Off Timer , 17 Auto Tray Swi tch , 18 C Clear Mo des ke y , 11 Clear/S top key , 11 Contra st , 18 Copy Coun t Display , 16 Copy Mod e , 3 , 8 Curs or keys , 11 E.
20 UE US A B04 5 MEMO Stel la-EN-Sy sF_V4 _FM.book Pag e 20 We dnesda y, July 4, 20 01 1:2 9 PM.
Operating I nstructions Facsimil e Reference <Basic Features> Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference.
i NOTICE R CAUT ION: Use of co ntrol s, adjus tmen ts or perf orman ce of pr ocedure s oth er than th ose specified herein may resul t in hazardous radiation exposure. Shie lde d in terc onne ct cabl es mu st be empl oye d wit h thi s eq uipm ent to en sure complianc e with the per tinent RF em ission limits g overning this devic e.
ii Note to users in Canada - - - - Note: This Class B digital ap paratus complies with Canad ian ICES-003. Remarque conce rnant les u tilisateurs au Canada - - - - Avertissement: Cet appareil num é rique de la c lasse B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Can- ada.
iii Important Safet y Instruc tions Caution When usi ng your telephon e equipment, bas ic safety prec autions should always b e f o l l o w e d t o r e d u c e t h e r i s k o f f i r e , e l e c t r .
iv How to Read this Manual Symb ols In th is manual, the following sym bols are used: R WARNING: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardo us situation that might result in death or serious i njury when you misuse the mac hine without following t he in- struc tions under thi s symb ol.
v Manuals f or This M achine Two Facsimile Reference manuals are provided, the Basic Fe atures manual and the Advanced Featur es manual. Please refer to the manual that suits your needs. Basic Fe atures (t his manual) The Basic Features manual ex plains the most frequently used fax functions and oper ation s.
vi TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. Getting Star ted Machi ne Typ es .... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ..... .... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... . 1 Guid e to C ompon ents .. ...... .... ...... ...... ...... .... ..... ...... .....
vii Reception Modes ...................................................................................... 31 Selecti ng the Reception Mode ......... .... ....... ..... ....... .... ....... ....... ..... ....... .... ... 31 3. Registering Own Name /Fax He ader/ Own Fax Number .
viii StellaCEN-basic_V4_FM. book Page viii Thursday, July 19, 2 001 1:39 PM.
1 1. Getting Started Machi ne Types This ma chine c omes in three models . Model A Model B Type1 Typ e1 Type 2 Copy Speed 12 copies/minute (A4, 8 1 / 2 " × 11" ) 13 copies/minute (A4, 8 1 /.
Getting Sta rted 2 1 Guide to Comp onents Front View Following illustra tion is for Model B. 1. Exposur e Glass Cov er Lower th e Exposure Glass Cover over originals placed on the exposure glass. 2. Document F eeder (ADF) (Optio n for T ype1 ) Originals wil l be fed automatical ly.
Guide t o Component s 3 1 6. Operation switch Press this switch to turn the power on (the On indi cator lights up). To t urn the power off, press this switch again (the On indicator goes off). See p.6 “ Tu rning On the P ower ” . 7. Pape r Tray Set paper he re.
Getting Sta rted 4 1 Control Panel 1. Receive File Indicator Lights when a me ssage has been received into memory. 2. Commu nic ati ng Ind icat or Lights during tran smission or reception. 3. { { { { Job Informati on } } } } key Press to search for information on a spe- cific jo b.
Control Panel 5 1 18. User Function k eys Each of these can b e program med for rapid ac cess to frequently used f unctions. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Function s Program med by Def ault 19. { { { { Resoluti on } } } } key Press to switch between St and ard , Deta il and Fine .
Getting Sta rted 6 1 Starti ng the Ma chine To s tart the mach ine, tur n on the op - eration switch. Note ❒ This ma chine a utom aticall y ent ers Energy Saver mode or turns itself off if you do not use the machine for a while. See Chapter 2 “ Se tting s You Ca n Chang e wit h the User Tools ” i n the System Settings ma n- ual.
Star ting the Mach ine 7 1 Turni ng Off the Po wer A A A A Turn off the operation switch. The On indicator will go out. Importa nt ❒ Befo re you unp lug the powe r cord , confirm tha t the disp lay in Facsimil e mode indi cates t hat the remaining memory space is 100%.
Getting Sta rted 8 1 Changing Modes This machi ne is both a fax and a co pier. If the machine is not in Facsim ile mode, press the { { { { Facsimi le } } } } key to use f ax function. You can se t this machine to disp lay facsimil e mode immedia tely a fter th e oper- ation switch is t urned on.
Reading t he Display 9 1 Reading t he Displ ay The machine status and instruc tions are shown on the display. Note ❒ All pro cedures in this manual assum e you are in Fac simile mo de. If the ma- chine is not in Facsi mile m ode, press t he { { { { Facsimile } } } } key to change to Facsim- ile mode.
Getting Sta rted 10 1 Standby Display While th e machin e is in stan dby mode (immediately after it is turned on or af- ter th e { { { { Cancel } } } } key is pressed), the fol- lowing display is sh own.
11 2. Faxing Transmiss ion Modes There are two types of transmission. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Memory Transmission When a fax doc ument is stor ed in memory, then tra nsmission starts autom atica lly. This makes it conv enient when you would like to take documents back in a hurr y.
Faxing 12 2 Switching between Memory Transmission and Immediate Transmissi on Pres s the { { { { Memory Tr ans. } } } } key to switch between Memory Transmis- sion and Immediate Transmission. When the indica tor of the { { { { Memo ry Trans. } } } } key is not lit, Immediate Transmission i s selected.
Setti ng O riginals 13 2 Setting O riginals You can set your orig inals either in the Docu ment Feeder o r on the expo- sure glass. Some types of original s are unsuitable for the Document Feeder so they must be set on the exposure glass.
Faxing 14 2 Placing a Sin gle Original on the Exposure Gla ss Set ori ginal s tha t cannot be pla ced i n the Docu ment Feeder, such as a book, on the exposure glass one page at a time .
Setti ng O riginals 15 2 A A A A Adjust the document guide to match the size of your originals. Align the edges of your originals and stack them in the Documen t Feeder face up. Adjust th e docu- ment guid e to ma tch th e size of the originals again.
Faxing 16 2 Memory Tr ansmission Memo ry Transm ission is conven ient because: • Fax documents can be scanned much more quickly. Your scanned docum ent is stored in the memor y, and then sent automatica lly, meaning you do not have to wait for your doc ument to send .
Memory Trans mission 17 2 B B B B Set the original. Lim ita tion ❒ You can send the first p ages from the exposure glass, and then the remaining pages from the Document Fee der. After you place the last page on th e expo- sure glass, you have 60 seconds to in sert the r emai ning page s in the Document Feeder.
Faxing 18 2 Sending Originals from the Exposure Glass A A A A Place the first page of your origi nal on the exp osure gl ass face d own. B B B B Dial. C C C C Press th e { { { { Sta rt } } } } key.
Cancelin g a Memory Transmis sion 19 2 Canceling a Me mory Transmissi on Before the St art Key is Pressed A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { Clear Modes } } } } key. Note ❒ When you set the document in the Document Feeder, yo u can cancel the transmission by just removing it.
Faxing 20 2 C C C C Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. D D D D Display the file you want to de- lete. Enter the file numbe r with the num- ber keys, or searc h using 0 or 1 . E E E E Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. F F F F Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to select " Yes " G G G G Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Immediate Tr ansmission 21 2 Immediate Trans mission Immediate Transmission is co nve- nient when: • You wish to send a document im- mediately as it is scanning. • You wish to quickly check w hether you have successfully connected with the o ther part y's fax machin e.
Faxing 22 2 Referen ce p.33 “ Own Name/Fax H ead- er/Own Fax Number ” After transm ission the machi ne will r eturn to standb y mo de. Sending Originals from the Exposure Glass A A A A Place the fi rst page face d own on the exposure glass . B B B B Dial.
Canceling an Imme diate Trans mission 23 2 Canceling an Imme diate Transmis sion Before t he Start key i s Pressed A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { Clear Modes } } } } key. Note ❒ When you have already set the orig inal, y ou c an als o canc el an Immediate Tr ansmission by re- moving the origi nal from the machine .
Faxing 24 2 Scan Settings You may w ish to send many different types of fax messages. Som e of these may be difficu lt to repr oduce at the othe r end. Ho wever , yo ur machi ne has three settings that you can adjust to help you transmit your doc ument with the best p ossible im age qual ity.
Scan Sett ings 25 2 Original Type If your origi nal contains phot o- gra phs, il lustr ation s or diag rams w ith complex shading p atterns or grays , select the app ropriate Original Ty pe to optimize image clarity. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Text Select Te xt to send an original con- taining a high-con trast black-and- white image.
Faxing 26 2 Dialing There are four m ain ways to dial a numb er: ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Entering Numbers Directly See p.26 “ Entering Num bers Di- rectly ” ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Using Quick Dials: See p.27 “ Using Quick Dials ” ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Using Speed Dials: See p.
Dialing 27 2 Note ❒ If a mem ory file is awai ting tran smi s- sion and the "Exceeded th e Max.Canno t Add" messa ge is dis- played when dialing with the num- ber keys, you cann ot dial any more num bers. That is b ecause the fa x number s have been dialed with the nu mbe r ke ys fo r s ome of th e f il es awaiting transmission.
Faxing 28 2 A A A A Make sure that the machine is in standby m ode. B B B B Set your original and select any scan settings you require. C C C C Press the Quick Dial key in which the desti nation' s number is pro - grammed. If the destination's name has been stored, the name i s shown on the displa y.
Dialing 29 2 C C C C Pre ss th e { { { { Speed D ial } } } } key. D D D D Enter the two d igit code (00 to 49) for the destination with the n um- ber keys . Note ❒ When a name is stor ed for the destination , the nam e is dis- played, and when no name is stored , the fax num ber is dis- play ed.
Faxing 30 2 When Specifying a Group wi th a Qui ck Dial Make su re that the Memory Tra ns- mission indicator is lit, if not, press the { { { { Memor y T rans. } } } } key to li ght it. Note ❒ You must register Groups to Quic k Dials bef orehand. See p.
Rec ept ion Mo des 31 2 Recepti on Modes The machine can treat incoming fax messages and telephone calls in three ways. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Manual Receive Use this mode if your line is s hared by a f ax mac hin e and a te lephon e but you wish to answer all calls yourself and decide whether they are fax do cuments or telephone calls .
Faxing 32 2 - - - - Distin ctive Ri ng Two num bers (telephone number and fax num ber) can be assigned to one line by making a contract with your telephone comp any for Distinc- tive Ring. Each number will have a different ringing pattern. This is use- ful for distingui shing a fax from a tele pho ne ca ll.
33 3. Registering Own Name/Fax Header/Own Fax Number Make sure t hat all necessary settings are made before connecting yo ur ma- chine to the te leph one li ne. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Own Name Th i s s ho ul d be yo ur na me o r co m- pany name, in 20 characters or l ess.
Register ing 34 3 Registering The fol lowing p rocedur e describes how to m ake i nitial sett ings. A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User To ols } } } } key. B B B B Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 4. Fax Fea- tures " is displayed. C C C C Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Own Name/Fax Heade r/Own Fax Number 35 3 L L L L Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. The programmed Own Name is disp lay ed. M M M M Enter your Fax Header. If your Fa x Header is the same as your Own Name, go to ste p N . N N N N Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Register ing 36 3 D D D D Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 3. Setup " is disp layed . E E E E Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. F F F F Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 6. Fax Info r- mation " is displayed. G G G G Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Own Name/Fax Heade r/Own Fax Number 37 3 F F F F Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 6. Fax Info r- mation " is displayed. G G G G Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. H H H H Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to select the item that yo u want to delete.
Register ing 38 3 Quick Di al To save time, you can program a fax number that you use often into a Quick Dial key. Then, w henever you are sending a message to that loca- tion, just press that Quick Dial key to dial . Register ing The fol lowing p rocedur e describes how to r egi ster fax nu mber s in Qu ick Dial ke ys.
Quick Dial 39 3 E E E E Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. F F F F Display the number of the Quick Dial ke y you wa nt to regi ster. Press a Quick Dial key, or search using 0 or 1 . Note ❒ If a Quick Dial has already been registered, the c ontents are dis- played.
Register ing 40 3 L L L L Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. If you want to stor e another Quick Dial, go t o step E . M M M M Pre ss th e { { { { User To ols } } } } key to re- turn to standby display. Edit ing The fol lowing p rocedur e describes how to edit fax numbers registered in Quick Dial keys.
Quick Dial 41 3 J J J J Press the { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key, an d then reenter the destination name. Note ❒ Under rare circu mstances , gar- bled characters may appear during name registration if yo u use the { { { { Pause/Redia l } } } } key to displa y the fax number of par- ties lo cated in other co untrie s.
Register ing 42 3 E E E E Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 2. Del. Quick Dial " is d isplayed. F F F F Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. G G G G Displ ay the Quic k Dial key th at you want to delete. Press a Quick Dial key or search by pressing 0 or 1 .
Quick Dial 43 3 Label pap er 1. Quic k Dial key nu mber 2. Destinati on name Stel laCEN-ba sic_V4 _FM.bo ok Page 43 Thu rsday , July 19, 2001 1:39 P M.
Register ing 44 3 Speed Dial Register ing If you regi ster numbers in Speed Di- als, y ou can spe cify the fax num ber simply b y pressing the { { { { Speed Dial } } } } key, and e nter ing a two- digit S peed Dia l n um be r. The fol lowing proced ure d escrib es how t o register fax number s in Speed Dia ls .
Speed Dial 45 3 G G G G Display the number of the Spe ed Dial you want to register (00 to 49). Enter the Speed Di al numb er with the number key s, or search using 0 or 1 . Note ❒ If you make a m istake, press the { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key and tr y again.
Register ing 46 3 Edit ing The fol lowing p rocedur e describes how to edit regist ered Speed Dial numb ers . A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User To ols } } } } key. B B B B Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 4. Fax Fea- tures " is displayed. C C C C Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Speed Dial 47 3 M M M M Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to se lect "On " or "Off". Note ❒ Label in sertion all ows the desti- nation name that i s pro- grammed in Quick Dial or Speed Di al to be p rinted on the fax w hen it is rece ived at the other end.
Register ing 48 3 E E E E Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 4. Del. Spe ed Dial " is d isplayed. F F F F Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. G G G G Display the Speed Dial number you want to delete (00 to 49). Enter the Speed Di al numb er with the number keys or search using 0 or 1 .
Groups 49 3 Grou ps If you regularly broa dcast document s to the same set of dest inations, you can combine these numbers into a group. Then just select the group and each number will be dialed in se- quence aut omati cally.
Register ing 50 3 ❒ It is recom men ded tha t you p rint the Group Dial list and keep it when you register or change desti- natio ns. See C hapter 5, "Print ing Repo rts/ List s" in the Ad van ced Features manual. ❒ If you register the same destination in different Groups, it is only counted as one item.
Groups 51 3 H H H H Specify the destination using one of the following three methods: Enter the f ax number with the number keys. Press a Quick Dial key. Press th e { { { { Speed D ial } } } } key, and then en ter a Speed Dial nu mber. I I I I Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Register ing 52 3 Edit ing You can edit th e group name or a dd destinat ions for programm ed groups. To edit a de stination : • For de stin atio ns progr amme d in Quick Dial or Speed Dial, edit the conten ts of the programmed Q uick Dial or Speed Dial.
Groups 53 3 L L L L Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. The name i s changed. M M M M Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to se lect " Yes" if the group w as programmed in a Quick Dial, or select "No" if it was not . N N N N Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Register ing 54 3 G G G G Display the number of the group to which you wa nt to add a num- ber (1 to 5). En ter th e gr ou p nu mb er w ith the number keys, or search using 0 or 1 . H H H H Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. I I I I Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to select "Yes".
Groups 55 3 R R R R Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. S S S S Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to se lect " Yes" if the group w as programmed in a Quick Dial, or select "No" if it was not . T T T T Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. If you selected "No", go to step V .
Register ing 56 3 E E E E Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 5. Prog. Grou p Dial " is disp laye d. F F F F Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. G G G G Display the group number for the destination yo u want to delete (1 to 5) . En ter th e gr ou p nu mb er w ith the number keys, or search using 0 or 1 .
Groups 57 3 T T T T Pres s th e { { { { OK } } } } key to return to standby m ode. If y ou wa nt to de let e ano the r des ti - natio n f rom the group , go to s tep F . U U U U Pre ss th e { { { { User To ols } } } } key to re- turn to standby mode. To delete an ent ire group A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User To ols } } } } key.
Register ing 58 3 - - - - To chan ge and d elete Quick Dials prog ram med as group s: To store an entire group u nder a dif- ferent Quick Dial key, or to delete the group from the Quic k Dial key al to- gether, perform the followin g proce- dure: A Press the { { { { User To ols } } } } key.
Enteri ng Character s 59 3 Ente rin g Cha ract ers This section describes how to enter characters. Availabl e Characters • Letters : ABCDEFGHIJK LMNOPQRSTUVWXYZa bcdefghij klmnopqr stuvwxyz • Symbol s: – _ (space) . , ( ) / @ & $ ! ' # * % + : ; < = > ? ^ [ ] ` { | } ∼ • Numbe rs : 0123456789 Keys 1.
Register ing 60 3 How to Enter Charact ers The fol lowing p rocedur e describes how to enter charact ers. Note ❒ When you enter a character, it is show n at th e posi tion of the curs or. If there is a character at the cursor position, the entered character is shown before the character.
61 4. Troubleshooting Adjust ing Volum e You ca n chan ge t he vol ume of the fol- lowing sou nds the mach ine makes. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ On Hook Sounds when you press the { { { { On Hook Dial } } } } key. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Transmission Sounds when th e machine se nd a message.
Troublesh ooting 62 4 H H H H Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to adjust the vol- ume. I I I I Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. The volume is adjusted. If you want to adjust anot her item, repeat steps G to I . J J J J Pre ss th e { { { { User To ols } } } } key to re- turn to standby display.
Erro r Mess ages 63 4 Erro r Mess age s If there is an erro r, one of the following messages may app ear on the display. It might just flash up briefly, so if you are wat ching for errors, stay by the machine and check the display. Messa ge Problem and Solution Cl ear Mi sfed Orig .
Troublesh ooting 64 4 When th e { { { { Facsimil e } } } } key is Lit in Re d When the { { { { Facs imil e } } } } key is lit in re d while machine is in Copy mode, press the { { { { Facsimile } } } } key and read the me ssage. If h i s lit, refer to the ta ble bel ow an d take t he appro priat e act ion.
When the Receive File I ndicato r is L it 65 4 When the Rec eive File Ind icator is Lit If t he Rec eive File indicator is li t, a messa ge has been receiv ed but could not be printed for some reason. T he message was stored in memory (Subst itute Recep- tion).
Troublesh ooting 66 4 Solving P roblems This table lists some common problems and their solutions. Pro blem Req uir ed A ctio n Image background appears dirty when a fax is re ceived at the other end. Adjust the scan density . Referenc e See p.25 “ Image Density (Contr ast) ” Printed or sent image contains spots.
67 INDEX A ADF → Document F eeder , 2 Adjusting Volume Alar m , 61 Dialing , 61 Key Tone , 61 On Hook , 61 Reception , 61 Transmissi on , 61 Advan ced Featur es , v Auto Receive , 31 Auto Select , 3.
68 L LCD display , 4 M Machi ne Ty pes , 1 Main Powe r Indica tor , 4 main pow er switch , 2 Manual Receive , 31 Manuals for This M achine , v Memory Trans.
69 V Volu me , 61 W Wild Cards , 60 Stel laCEN-ba sic_V4 _FM.bo ok Page 69 Thu rsday , July 19, 2001 1:39 P M.
70 MEMO Stel laCEN-ba sic_V4 _FM.bo ok Page 70 Thu rsday , July 19, 2001 1:39 P M.
71 MEMO Stel laCEN-ba sic_V4 _FM.bo ok Page 71 Thu rsday , July 19, 2001 1:39 P M.
72 UE US A B46 5 MEMO Stel laCEN-ba sic_V4 _FM.bo ok Page 72 Thu rsday , July 19, 2001 1:39 P M.
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book= 92 // Pri nt scale =81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thi ckness / 2 = 3.
i How to Read this Manual Symb ols In th is manual, the following sym bols are used: R WARNING: This symbol indicates a potentially hazardo us situation that might result in death or serious i njury when you misuse the mac hine without following t he in- struc tions under thi s symb ol.
ii Manuals f or This M achine Two Facsimile Reference manuals are provided, the Basic Fe atures manual and the Advanced Featur es manual. Please refer to the manual that suits your needs. Advanced Features (t his manual) The Advanced Feature s manual describes more advanced functions and also ex- plains settings for ke y operators.
iii TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. Transmis sion Optio ns Sendin g at a Spec ific Ti me (Sen d Later ) ... ....... .... ...... .... ...... .... ...... .... ...... 1 Fax H eader Prin t ..... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... .... ..... ...... ...... .... .
iv Prin ted Rep orts. ...... .... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... ...... ..... ...... .... ...... ...... ...... .... ...... . 25 File Reserve Report (Switch 03, Bit 2) ......................................................... 25 Communication Result Report (Switch 03, Bit 0) .
v 6. Key Operator Setti ngs Functi on L ist ........ .... ...... .... ...... ...... .... ...... .... ....... .... ...... .... ...... .... ...... .... .... 49 Usin g Key Oper ator Set ting s..... .... ...... ...... ...... ... ...... ...... ...... .....
vi Stell aCE N-advan ced_ V4_F M.boo k Page vi Tues day, July 17, 2001 1: 01 PM.
1 1. Transmission Options Sending at a Speci fic Time (Send Later) Using the Send Later functi on, you can delay transmission of your fax message until a specified t ime. This allows you to ta ke advanta ge of off- peak teleph one line charges without having to be by the machine at the time of transmission.
Transmissi on Opti ons 2 1 K K K K Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. The speci fied time i s set. L L L L Specify the destination. If you want to sp ecify another des- tination, press the { { { { OK } } } } key an d repeat st ep L . M M M M Pre ss th e { { { { Start } } } } key.
Fax Header Pr int 3 1 Fax Header Print Normally, the Fax H eader pr o- grammed i n your mach ine is print ed at the to p of each of the pa ges you transmit whe n they are rec eived at the ot her end . The top of the image will be ove rprin ted if the re is no mar- gin at t he top of th e transmit ted page.
Transmissi on Opti ons 4 1 Label Inse rtio n With thi s func tion, y ou can hav e the receive r's name p rogramme d in Quick Dial or Speed Dial printed on the mess age wh en it is rec eived at the other end. The nam e will be printed at the top o f the page and w ill be pre- cede d by "To".
Calling to Req uest a Messa ge (Polling Rece ption) 5 1 Call ing to Request a Messag e (Polling Recepti on) Use this func tion if you want to poll a message from anot her termina l.
Transmissi on Opti ons 6 1 E E E E Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to select "On". F F F F Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. G G G G Select the type of Polling Rece p- tion. Secured Polling Reception A A A A Press 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to select ” Def ault ” .
Calling to Req uest a Messa ge (Polling Rece ption) 7 1 File Reserve Report (Polling RX) This report is printed after Poll ing Re- ception has been set up. You ca n che ck th e da te and time , Fax Header, File N o., Transmis sion con- dition and the Other party's name with thi s report .
Transmissi on Opti ons 8 1 Stel laCEN- advanced _V4_FM .book Page 8 Tuesda y, Jul y 17, 2 001 1: 01 PM.
9 2. Job Information Canceling T ransmission or Re ception Transmission files are originals that have been stored in mem ory and are awaiting transmission.
Job Informat ion 10 2 Printing a Li st of Files in Memo ry (Print File List ) Print this list if you wish to find out which fi les are st ored in memory and what their file numb ers are. Knowing the file num ber can be useful (for ex- ample when er asing files).
Printing a Sto red Messag e (Print TX File) 11 2 Printi ng a Stor ed Mess age (P rint TX File) If yo u w ish to ch ec k th e c on t en ts of a fax that is store d in memory an d has not been sent yet, use this p rocedu re to prin t it out. A A A A Make sure that the machine is in Facsimile m ode and the standby display is shown.
Job Informat ion 12 2 Printing a M emory-lock ed Message This is a security function that pre- vents unaut horized individu als from reading printed m essages. If Memory Lock is s witch ed on, all recei ved mes - sag es ar e sto red in mem ory and ar e not auto matical ly printed.
Printi ng the Journa l 13 2 Printing the Journal When au tomati c co mmunicati on report pr inting is t urned o n, th e Jour nal is printed automatica lly after every 50 communications (receptions + transmis- sions). You can also print a copy of the Journal at any time by following the pro- cedure b elow.
Job Informat ion 14 2 Report For mats 1. The Mode Col umn Codes and al phabet on this column in- form the type of communication. These codes are exp lained on the bottom of th e report. 2. The Result Column OK : Successf ul comm unicat ion E: An error occurred D: Power Fai lure 3.
15 3. Other Transmission Features Handy Dialing Functions Chain Dial This function allows yo u to compose a telephone number from various parts, some of which may be regis- tered in Quick Dials or Speed Dials and some of which may be entered using the number keys.
Other Transmi ssion Feat ures 16 3 Tele phone Directory This funct ion le ts yo u find a regi s- tere d Speed Dial q uickly by jus t en- tering a single letter, for example, the first letter of the name registered for that numbe r. Limitatio n ❒ Speed Di al codes cannot be searched for by symbol or numbe r.
On Hook Dial 17 3 On Hook Dial You can send a fax message withou t lifting the re ceiver, while st ill listen- ing to the dial tone. If the other party has a telephone fax machine, you can t alk by lifting the receiver after your machi ne has con- nec ted to thei rs.
Other Transmi ssion Feat ures 18 3 Manual Dial The externa l telephone is r equired. You can send a fax message using a n extern al telephone. Note ❒ The result of transmissi on with manual d ial is not mentio ned in the Transmission Result Report (Immediate Transmission).
Transmiss ion Features 19 3 Transmiss ion Features SEP Code If you want to recei ve a mess age stored i n the mem ory of anot her par- ty's fax machi ne, use this fu nction. The machine w ill receive the message with the SEP and PWD code tha t matc hes the S EP and PW D code yo u enter i n the follow ing procedur e.
Other Transmi ssion Feat ures 20 3 H H H H Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 3. Polling RX " is displayed. I I I I Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. J J J J Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to select "On". K K K K Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Transmiss ion Features 21 3 D D D D Confirm that " 1. SUB " is dis- played. E E E E Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. F F F F Enter the SUB code with the num- ber keys .
Other Transmi ssion Feat ures 22 3 More Transmission Functions If M emory R uns Out While Storing an Origin al A A A A If you run out of memory w hile storing an original (free space reache s 0%), “Memory is Full.S tori ng Sto pped .” is dis- played.
More Tran smission Functio ns 23 3 Broadcasting Sequen ce If you d ial severa l dest inations f or the same messa ge (Broa dcasti ng), the messages are sent in the order in which they we re diale d.
Other Transmi ssion Feat ures 24 3 Dual Access The machine can scan other messages into memory even while sending a fax message from memory, receiving a message into mem ory , or automat- ical ly pr inting a rep ort.
Printed Repo rts 25 3 Printed Reports You can o btain repo rts from your ma- chine either by having you r machine print them out automatically, or by print ing them o ut your self. Note ❒ You can switch on o r off t he print- ing of the var ious repo rts with the User Parameters.
Other Transmi ssion Feat ures 26 3 Transmissi on Result Report (Immediat e Transmission) (Switc h 03, B it 5) If you t urn on th e printing of this re- port, a rep ort wi ll be print ed af ter ev- ery Immed iate Transmission so you have a record of whether the tran s- miss ion wa s succ essful or not.
27 4. Reception Features General Imme diate Recepti on Each pa ge of a r eceiv ed f ax mes sage is prin ted as soon as it is re ceived . This method is used for standard fax mes- sages. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Display d uring rec eption The sender 's name or f ax number appears on the upper li ne.
Rec ept ion Feat ure s 28 4 Printing Documents that hav e been Received i nto Memory (Substitute Reception) If any of th e conditions li sted below are met, the machine automatically swit ches to Memory Rece ption m ode and stores messages in memory i n- stead o f prin ting them.
Genera l 29 4 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Free The machin e switc hes to Subs titute Reception regardl ess of whether or not th e sender has p rogrammed their nam e or fax number. Receiving Mess ages in Telephone Mode I n t h i s m o d e y o u h a v e t o a n s w e r t h e call yourse lf an d decid e whet her it is a fax or a telephone call.
Rec ept ion Feat ure s 30 4 Printing Options Center Mark W h e n t h i s f u n c t i o n i s t u r n e d o n , marks are p rinted halfway dow n the left side an d at th e top cen ter of eac h page received. T his makes it easy for you to positio n a hole puncher cor - rectly whe n you file rec eived messag- es.
Prin ting O ption s 31 4 Reception Time When th is fu nct ion is turne d on, you can have the date and time when a message was re ceived printed at the botto m of the receiv ed image . Turn it on or off with the User Para meters (Switc h 02 Bit 2). See p.
Rec ept ion Feat ure s 32 4 When There is No Paper of the Correct Size If there is no paper in your machine that matches the size of a received message, the machine wi ll choose a pa per size based upon the pap er you have avai lable.
Prin ting O ption s 33 4 Limitatio n ❒ The paper size used to print a r eceived message may be different from the size of the sent origin al. Referenc e p.
Rec ept ion Feat ure s 34 4 Stel laCEN-a dvanced _V4_FM .book Page 34 Tuesday , July 17, 20 01 1:0 1 PM.
35 5. Facsimile User Tools User F unction K eys You ca n program eac h of the User Fun ction keys ( { { { { F1 } } } } to { { { { F3 } } } } ) with a function that you use fr equently. When you wish t o use that funct ion, instead o f having to search through s everal menus to fi nd it, just pr ess the appropriat e User Func- tion key.
Facsimil e User Tools 36 5 • The " b " notation indicates that the User Functi on key lights when that func- tion is s elected ” On ” . To assign a function to a User Function key, perform the following proce dure. Making a User Function Key Assignment A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User To ols } } } } key.
User Functi on Keys 37 5 I I I I Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. If you want to regi ster another User Funct ion key, repeat th e above steps from step F . J J J J Pre ss th e { { { { User To ols } } } } key. The machin e returns to standby mod e.
Facsimil e User Tools 38 5 I I I I Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to display " None ". J J J J Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. If you want to delete another User Function key, repeat the above steps from step G . K K K K Pre ss th e { { { { User To ols } } } } key.
Printi ng Reports/ Lists 39 5 Printi ng Repo rts/Li sts This functi on allows you to prin t the foll owin g repor ts an d lis ts manu ally . Select a re port or list as need ed. • Journal See p.13 “ Prin ting the Journa l ” . • TX Fil e Li st See p.
Facsimil e User Tools 40 5 Printing the Quick Dial List A A A A Press 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 3. Dial List " is displayed. B B B B Press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. Confirm that " 1. Quick Dial List " is displaye d. C C C C Press th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Printi ng Reports/ Lists 41 5 Printing the Quick Dial Label A A A A Press 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 4. Quick Dial Label " is d ispla yed. B B B B Press th e { { { { OK } } } } key. Note ❒ If you make a mistake, pr ess the { { { { Cancel } } } } key and t ry agai n.
Facsimil e User Tools 42 5 Adjust ing the Di spla y Contr ast Use this function to adjust the bright- ness of the display. A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User To ols } } } } key. B B B B Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 4. Fax Fea- tures " is displayed.
Setti ng th e Date and Time 43 5 Setting the Date and Time Use t his fun ction to set you r ma - chine's internal cl ock to the current time and da te. If the current date and time are wrong, use this procedure to corre ct them. Note ❒ If you make a mistake w hen enter- ing numbers, press the { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key and try again.
Facsimil e User Tools 44 5 Q Q Q Q Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. After " Function Accep ted " flashes brief ly in th e disp lay, the next set- ting is displayed. R R R R Pre ss th e { { { { User To ols } } } } key to re- turn to standby display.
Sett ing the Auto Ring Time 45 5 Setting t he Auto Ring Time In A uto Se lect mo de, t he mac hine rings a number of times to give you the c hance to pic k up th e han dset b e- fore taking the call au tomatically. You can change the number of rings with the Auto Ri ng Time.
Facsimil e User Tools 46 5 Setting t he Fax Reset Timer This machine automatically returns to the standby m ode if you do not use the mac hin e for a ce rtain peri od o f time . You can sele ct this peri od. A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User To ols } } } } key.
On Hook Timeout 47 5 On Hook Ti meout This mach ine automatically can cels the O n Hook Dial m ode if y ou do not dial a number from the numeric key- pad for a certain p eriod of t ime after pressi ng th e { { { { On Ho ok Dial } } } } key. Yo u can selec t this pe riod.
Facsimil e User Tools 48 5 Stel laCEN-a dvanced _V4_FM .book Page 48 Tuesday , July 17, 20 01 1:0 1 PM.
49 6. Key Operator Settings Function List Here is a list of the functions tha t are available for setting. Pleas e refer to the ref- erence page numbe rs for more informat ion. Copy this table and use it as a quick referenc e. Displ ay (Specs.) Description Referenc e 1.
Key Operator Set tings 50 6 Using Ke y Opera tor Set tings Thi s ch apter expl ains about fun ctio ns the ke y op erat or hand les . Memory Lock This is a se curity f unction to prevent unauth orized indiv idual s fr om re ad- ing pr inted f ax mes sages.
Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 51 6 Registering a Specified Sender for Memory Lock You can r egister Speci fied Sender s for thi s functio n. A A A A Press 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to display " 2. Program Sender ". B B B B Press th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Key Operator Set tings 52 6 Forwarding Use this function to print fax specified from Spec ified Send ers on your ow n machine and then forward the m es- sages to other fax machines.
Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 53 6 D D D D Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 4. Key Op. Tools " is displayed. E E E E Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. F F F F Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 2. Forward- ing " is displayed. G G G G Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Key Operator Set tings 54 6 J J J J Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to display t he num- ber of the forward ing station you want to r egister . If a forwarding station is already registered, the fax number for th at station i s displayed. K K K K Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 55 6 D D D D Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 4. Key Op. Tools " is displayed. E E E E Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. F F F F Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 2. Forward- ing ” is displayed. G G G G Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Key Operator Set tings 56 6 H H H H Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 3. Delete Sta- tion " is displayed. I I I I Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. J J J J Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to di spl ay th e fax number of the Forwarding Sta- tion you want to delete.
Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 57 6 O O O O Use 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 to display the Speci- fied Sender you w ant to delet e. P P P P Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. The Speci fied Sender is deleted. If you want to delete another Spec- ified Sender, repeat the above steps from step N .
Key Operator Set tings 58 6 User P aramet ers The User Parameters allow you to customize various settings to match your needs. To cha nge the f unction setti ngs, set the user p arameter s witches. Prep arat ion Access to some User Parameter Settings requires installation of optional equipment or that other settings be made beforehand.
Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 59 6 02 0 Default setting for printing the Forwar ding Mark. FORWAR DING MARK On Off 1 Defa ult s ettin g for th e Cen- ter Mark . CENTER MAR K On Off 2 Default setting for printi ng the Reception Time. RECEPT ION TI ME On Off 3 Print Sender In formation (TSI P rint) On Off 4 Default setting for the Checke red Mark.
Key Operator Set tings 60 6 05 0 Store incoming fa xes when machine is out of supplies. SUBSTI TUTE RECEP- TION On Off 1 Default setting for Sub sti- tute Reception . CONDIT IONS OF MEM- ORY RECE PTIO N Rej ect (I f no name or fax number is re- ceiv ed) Accept (Free) 4 Restricts fax machine u s- age to sp ecific us ers.
Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 61 6 Changing the User Parameters We recommend that you print the User Parameter list and keep it when you register or change a user parame- ter. See p.62 “ Pr inting the User Pa- rameter List ” . Do not change any bit switches other than th ose s hown o n the prev ious pages.
Key Operator Set tings 62 6 H H H H Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. For a list of the sw itches and set- tings, see p.58 “ User Pa rameter s ” . Use the User Parame ters table to look up the number of the s witch that you want to change, and then press the 0 or 1 ke y to dis play the num ber of th e swit ch.
Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 63 6 K K K K Pre ss th e { { { { User To ols } } } } key to re- turn to the standby displa y. Personal Codes This func tion allows you to kee p track of machine usage. When Per- sonal Codes are programmed, users have to enter their Pe rsonal Co de be- fore they send a fax.
Key Operator Set tings 64 6 Deleting A A A A Pre ss th e { { { { User To ols } } } } key. B B B B Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 4. Fax Fea- tures " is displayed. C C C C Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. D D D D Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 4.
Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 65 6 F F F F Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 4. Personal Code " is displayed. G G G G Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. H H H H Pre ss 0 0 0 0 or 1 1 1 1 until " 3. Print List " is displa yed. I I I I Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key.
Key Operator Set tings 66 6 ID Code Use th is procedure to register th e fol- lowing kind s of ID Codes: Important ❒ You can con firm ID Code s in the Param eter Setti ngs list. We recom- mend you prin t a new list e ach time you register or change I D Codes.
Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 67 6 J J J J Enter the Memory L ock ID (4-dig- its) with the number keys. If yo u ma ke a mist ake, pr ess the { { { { Clear/Stop } } } } key and try again. K K K K Pre ss th e { { { { OK } } } } key. If you want to enter anot her item, repeat the above steps from step I .
Key Operator Set tings 68 6 PSTN Access Number Use this setting to save having to en- ter a pause a fter the PSTN acces s number when dialing. W hen you pro- gram an access number, a pause is au- tomatically added as soon as that numbe r is press ed.
Using Key Oper ator Settin gs 69 6 Memory File Transfer If th e machi ne cann ot prin t out a re- ceived message, you c an send all mes- sages currently stor ed in memory to another fax machi ne and have them printed o ut there (for example, w hen toner is empty, pa per has run out, or the print ing function is ou t of order).
Key Operator Set tings 70 6 RDS (Remote Diagn ostic Syste m) If your machine has a problem, a ser- vice representative c an perform vari- ous diag nosti c ta sks o ver the telephone line from the service sta- tion to try to find out wha t is wrong with your machi ne.
71 7. Troubleshooting Reading Repor ts Error Report An error report i s print ed when a message could not be successfully sent or received. Possible causes include a probl em with your machine or noise on the telep hone l ine . I f an er ror oc curs dur- ing transmission, re-send the original .
Troublesh ooting 72 7 Stel laCEN-a dvanced _V4_FM .book Page 72 Tuesday , July 17, 20 01 1:0 1 PM.
73 8. Appendix Connecting to a Telephone L ine and a Telephone To connect th e machine to a teleph one line, use a snap-in modular type connec- tor. Important ❒ Make s ure the connector i s the co rrect t ype befor e you sta rt.
Appendix 74 8 Connecting the O ptional Handset and an External Telephone You can conne ct the handset and an external teleph one to the ma chine. You can u se them for t elephone calls. Note ❒ Some telephone may not be con- nected or may suffer reduced func- tionalit y.
Specificat ions 75 8 Speci fications Base Machi ne ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Power Co nsumptio n ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Proto col: G3 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Resolution: • Standard : 8 × 3.
Appendix 76 8 Available Options ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Expansio n Memory (32MB) Increase memor y capacity . ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Paper Tray Unit (Option for Model B only) Holds 500 sheets of paper. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Document Feeder (ADF) (Option for Type1) Originals will be fe d auto matica lly.
Specificat ions 77 8 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Document Feeder (ADF) Limitatio n ❒ Even if an or iginal is correct ly placed on the exposure gla ss or in the Doc u- ment Feede r, a ma rgin of 3m m to 5 mm (0.1 ” to 0.2 ” )around each ed ge of the original m ay not be sent.
Appendix 78 8 Maximum Values The followi ng list contains the maximum value for each item. Item Standard Memory 1MB The number of pages that you can store in memory (Using A4 size Standard <ITU-T #.
Advanced Tr ansmissio n Features 79 8 Advanced Trans missio n Features Fun ctions selecta ble with the { { { { Tr ans. Opti on } } } } key are as follows. Function name Description Reference Send Later Sets the machine to automati- cally start transmissi on or polling rece ption at an ap- pointed time.
Appendix 80 8 Job Information Fun ctions selecta ble with the { { { { Job Informati on } } } } key are as follows. Functi on name Descri ption Ref erence Cancelin g Tran smission or Reception This function ca ncels a file (res ervation) for Memory Tr ansmission or Polling R ecepti on.
User Tools 81 8 User T ools Function name Description Reference Register/Delete Quick Dial When you register a destina- tion in a Quick Dial, you can specify th e destin ation by only pressing the Qu ick Dial key. Chapter3 “ Quick Di al ” in th e Basic Features manual .
Appendix 82 8 Setting the Aut o Ring Time You can alter the n umber of rings by changi ng the Auto Ring Time. p.45 “ Setting th e Auto Ring Time ” Fax Information Registers your Ow n Name, Fax Header and Own Fax Number. Chapter3 “ Own Name /Fax Header / Ow n Fax Number ” in the Basic Features manu al.
Key Operat or Tool s 83 8 Key Opera tor Tools Function nam e Descripti on Ref erence Memory Lock All rec eived message s are stored in me mory an d are not automa tically prin ted. p.50 “ Memor y Lock ” Forwardi ng Transfers rec eived mes- sages to a registered re- ceiver (forwardi ng destin ation).
84 INDEX A Adju stin g Vo lume → Monitor Vo lume , 81 Advanced Transmis sion Featur es , 79 Ass igning User Funct ion Keys , 36 , 81 Auto Fax Reception P ower- up , 29 Automatic Redial , 23 Auto Rin.
85 M Manual Dial , 18 Maximum Valu es , 78 Memory File Tran sfer , 69 , 83 Memory Lock , 50 , 83 Memory -locke d Messa ge , 12 , 80 Memory Lock ID , 66 Memory Recepti on , 27 Monit or Volume , 81 More.
86 UE US A B46 5 S Secured Polling Reception , 5 Send Later , 1 , 79 SEP Code , 19 SID , 20 Specifica tions , 75 Specif ied Sen der , 55 , 56 Specif ied Sen der list , 57 Speed D ial , 81 Speed D ial .
Paper t ype: OK Pr ince Eco G10 0(55kg), Paper Thic kness=80 µ m // Pages in book= 92 // Pri nt scale =81% Gap (when print ed at 81% sc ale) = Pages in book × Pape r thi ckness / 2 = 3.68 0000 mm Introduc tion This m anual co ntains de tailed instr uctions on the operati on and ma intenan ce of t his mac hine.
PRINTER Controller Type 1013 Operating I nstructions Printer Reference 2 (option) Read this manual carefully before you use this product and keep it handy for future reference.
Introduction This man ual conta ins deta iled i nstructio ns on t he operati on and maintena nce of thi s machi ne. To g et maximu m versa tility from this machi ne all op erators sho uld careful ly read and fol low the ins tructions in this man ual. Please k eep this m anual in a han dy place near the m achine.
i Manuals for This Machine Manuals for Th is Machin e There are ten manuals that separately describe the operational procedures for the operation and maintenance of the machine. To enhance saf e and efficient operation of the machine, all users sh ould read and follow the instructi ons contained in the following manuals.
ii How to Read This Manual Symbols In this manual, the following sy mbols are used: R WARNING: This sym bol indicates a potentia lly hazardo us situat ion which, if instruction s are not followed, could result in death or serious inj ury.
iii TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job PCL 6/5e - Acce ssing the Printer P roperties ................. ......... .............. ... 1 Windows 95/98/Me - Accessing the Pr inter Properties .......... ........ ..
iv 4. Using the Control Panel Adjusting Printer Fe atures ............. .............. .......... .............. .............. ..... 24 Printer Features Menu . ........ ..... ........ ........ ..... ........ ........ ..... ........ ........ ..... ...
1 1. Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job PCL 6/5e - Accessing the Printer Properties Windows 95/98/ Me - Accessing t he Printer Proper ties Changing the default printer settings A Click [ Star t ] on the taskbar, point to [ Settings ] , an d then click [ Printers ] .
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 2 1 B Select the printer you w ant to use in the [ Name ] list bo x, and then clic k [ Prop- erties ] . The Printer Properties appear. C Make any setting s you require and click [ Apply ] . D Click [ OK ] to start printing.
PCL 6/5e - Accessing the Printer Properties 3 1 B Click to select the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change. C On the [ Fi le ] menu, click [ Printing Pr eferenc es... ] . The Printing Preferen ces Properties ap pear. D Make any setting s you require and click [ Apply ] .
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 4 1 Windows NT 4.0 - Acces sing the Pri nter Propert ies Changing the default printer settings - Printer Properties Limita tion ❒ Changing the setting of the printer requir es Full Control acc ess permission.
PCL 6/5e - Accessing the Printer Properties 5 1 Making printer settings from an a pplication To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printer Proper- ties dialog box from that app lication. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with W indows NT 4.
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 6 1 PostScript - Setting Up for Printing Windows 95/98/ Me - Accessing t he Printer Proper ties Changing the default printer settings To make the Printer default settings, first open th e Printer Properties dialog box from the [ Prin ter s ] window.
PostScript - Setting Up for Printing 7 1 B Select the printer you w ant to use in the [ Name ] list bo x, and then clic k [ Prop- erties ] . The Printer Properties appear. C Make any setting s you require and click [ Apply ] . D Click [ OK ] to start printing.
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 8 1 B Click to select the icon of the printer whose default settings you want to change. C On the [ Fi le ] menu, click [ Printing Pr eferenc es... ] . The Printing Preferen ces Properties ap pear.
PostScript - Setting Up for Printing 9 1 Windows NT 4.0 - Acces sing the Pri nter Propert ies Changing the default printer settings - Printer Properties Limita tion ❒ Changing the setting of the printer requir es Full Control acc ess permission.
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 10 1 Making printer settings from an a pplication To make the printer settings for a specific application, open the Printer Proper- ties dialog box from that app lication. The following example describes how to make settings for the WordPad application that comes with W indows NT 4.
PostScript - Setting Up for Printing 11 1 Setting up for printing from an applicat ion A Open the file you w ant to print. B On the [ Fi le ] menu, click [ Print ] . The [ Pr int er ] dial og box appears. C Confirm that the prin ter is se lected in the [ Printer : ] box, and make the print- er setting s.
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 12 1 Canceling a Print Job Windows 95/9 8/Me, Wi ndows 2000, Wi ndows NT 4.0 - Ca ncelin g a Print Job A Double-click the printer icon on the Window s taskbar. A window appears, showing a ll the print jobs that are curren tly queuing to be printed.
Canceling a Print Job 13 1 Macintosh - Cancel ing a P rint Job A Double-click the printer's icon on the desktop. A window appears, showing a ll the print jobs that are curren tly queuing to be printed. Chec k the current status of the job you w ant to cancel.
Setting Up the Printer Driver and Canceling a Print Job 14 1.
15 2. Uninstalling the Printer Driver and Software Uninstalling the PCL 6/5e Printer Driver This section des cribes how to uninstall the printer driver. The actual procedure may differ depend ing on the operating system. Fo llow one o f th e ap prop riat e pr oced ur es be low .
Uninstalling the Printer Driver and Software 16 2 Windows NT 4.0 - Uni nstalling th e PCL 6/5e Prin ter Drive r Limita tion ❒ Uninstalling a printer driver re quires Full Con trol access per mission. Mem- bers of the Administr ators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Us- ers groups have Full Control Permission by default.
Uninstalling the PostScript Printer Driver 17 2 Uninstalling the PostScript Printer Driver This section de scribes how to un install the PostScri pt printer driver. Th e actu al p roced ur e may diffe r dep end ing on the ope rati ng sys tem . Fo llow one o f th e ap prop riat e pr oced ur es be low .
Uninstalling the Printer Driver and Software 18 2 Windows NT 4.0 - Uni nstalling th e PostScript Printer Drive r Limita tion ❒ Uninstalling a printer driver re quires Full Con trol access per mission. Mem- bers of the Administr ators, Server Operators, Print Operators, and Power Us- ers grou ps have F ull Con trol Permissi on by def ault.
19 3. Troubleshooting Error & Status Messages o n the Control Panel Messages/Second m essages Description Solution Add Toner Open Front Cover and /Follow Instructions to Repl ace it Toner is running o ut. It is time to supply toner . Clear Misfeed(s) /Follow instructions in Front Cover There is misf eed at the front cover.
Troubleshooting 20 3 Processing... The printer is processing in- ternally. Wait for a while. Ready The printer is online and ready to print. If you want to set the printer offline, press { Online } . Resetting Job... The print job is being reset. Wait for a while.
Machine Does Not Print 21 3 Machine Does Not Print Pos sibl e Cau se Solut ions Is the power on? Turn on the machine. Is the interface cable p roperly connected? Connect the interface cable properly. If there are any connectors or screws , make sure that they are f astened securely.
Troubleshooting 22 3 Other Printing Problems Problem Action An image is printed on the reverse side of the paper. Set the pa per upside down. Multiple pages are fed through the printer at once. Remove all the p aper from the tray and fan them gently. Paper misf eeds occur frequently.
23 4. Using the Control Panel Though th e factory default settings of th e printer are suitable for most printing jobs, the "Printer Features" gives you access to a number of settings that control basic printer operations. "Prin ter Features" se ttings you make are retai ned even when you turn off the printer.
Using the Control Panel 24 4 Adjusting Printer Features Printer Features Menu There are four men u items in the "Printer Features " menu. • Job Control • Network Setu p • Mainte nance • List Print You can select fu nctions in the following table.
Adjusting Printer Features 25 4 *1 Optional Network Interfac e Board is r equired. *2 Optional PostScri pt level2 Compatibl e Kit is required. Access ing the P rinter Fe atures Menu Press { User Tools/ Counter } . Press the 0 or 1 key to display “ 5.
Using the Control Panel 26 4 Note ❒ 1 key : Press to go to the next menu. ❒ 0 key : Press to go back to the previous menu ❒ After makin g the pr inter sett ings , be su re to re turn to the pre vious me nu by pressin g { Cancel } . ❒ After making the printer settings, press { User Tools/Counter } to return to the initial display.
Printer Features Parameters 27 4 Printer Features Parameters Job Control Menu There are four menu items in the “ Job Control ” men u. • Paper Inpu t • Print Quality • Sys tem • PCL Menu Jo.
Using the Control Panel 28 4 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Print Quality Bypas s Paper Size You can sp ecify the paper s ize, st andar d or cu stom, fo r the by pass tray. When the bypa ss pap er size is not spe cified , the pap er siz e you set on the control panel is used.
Printer Features Parameters 29 4 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ System Toner Saving You can select whether to enable Toner Saving. • Off • On Note ❒ Default: Off ❒ If “ Toner Saving ” is “ On ” , “ EdgeSmoothing ” is ignored even if it is “ On ” .
Using the Control Panel 30 4 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ PCL Menu Auto Continue You can set whethe r to enable Auto Continue. When it is set to “ On ” , the printing continues even if the following error messages appear on the displ ay. “ Print Overrun. Job Incomplete.
Printer Features Parameters 31 4 Font Number You can set the ID of the default font you want to use. • 0 to 54 (for Int erna l) • 1 to 50 (for Down load sourc e) Note ❒ Default: Interna l ❒ Default: 0 Point Size You can set the point size you want to use for the default font.
Using the Control Panel 32 4 Changing the Paper Input Menu The followin g procedure describes changing the “ Tray Pri ority ” as an example in the “ Pape r Input ” m enu. A Press { User Tools/Counter } . B Press the 0 or 1 k ey until the following message appears on the panel d is- play.
Printer Features Parameters 33 4 F Press { OK } . The following sc reen appears on the panel display. G Press the 0 or 1 key to select the tray type you want to use. H Press { OK } . “ Programmed ” is displayed for two seconds. I The following screen appears on the p anel display.
Using the Control Panel 34 4 Network Setup Menu There are thr ee menu items in the “ Network Setup ” menu. • IP Ad dres s • Subne t Ma sk • Gateway Address Note ❒ This “ Ne twork Setup ” menu appears only when installin g the optional Net- work Interface Board.
Printer Features Parameters 35 4 Maintenanc e Menu There are thr ee menu items in the “ Mai ntenanc e ” menu. • Restart Printer • Menu Re set • Hex Dump Maintenan ce Parame ters Restar ting a Printe r The following procedure describes select ing the “ R estart Printer ” as an example in the “ Mainte nance ” me nu.
Using the Control Panel 36 4 B Press the 0 or 1 k ey until the following message appears on the panel d is- play. C Press { OK } . The following sc reen appears on the panel display. D Press the 0 or 1 k ey until the following message appears on the panel d is- play.
Printer Features Parameters 37 4 List Prin t Menu There are four menu items in the “ List Print ” menu. • Configuration Pa ge • Menu Li st • PCL Font List • PS Font List List Print Parame .
Using the Control Panel 38 4 C Press { OK } . The following sc reen appears on the panel display. D Press the 0 or 1 k ey until the following message appears on the panel d is- play. E Press { OK } . The following sc reen appears on the panel display.
Printer Features Parameters 39 4 Interpreting the Conf iguration Page Reference ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Printer ID Shows the serial number ass igned to the board by its manuf acturer. ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Firmware Vers ion Shows the version number of the prin ter firmware.
Using the Control Panel 40 4 Adjusting System Settings Accessing the S ystem Sett ings A Press { User Tools/ Counter } . B Press the 0 or 1 key to display “ 2.System Settings ” . C Press { OK } . The following sc reen appears on the panel display.
Adjusting System Settings 41 4 System Settings Parameters This sect ion cont ains the information about the param eters used for th e printer. Reference For more information about the other pa rameters in the System Setti ngs menu, see th e “ System Settings ” manual.
Using the Control Panel 42 4.
43 5. Appendix Specifications This secti on contains the electrical and hardware specifica tions for the printer, including the information about the options.
Appendix 44 5 Options Networ k Interfac e Board T ype 1018 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Topology: Ethernet (10BaseT /100BaseTX) ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Protocols: TCP/IP , IPX/SPX , AppleTalk ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Interface Connect or: RJ45 ❖ ❖ ❖ ❖ Required C able: Int erf ace c ab le wi th f erri te c ore Interface cable is no t provided with th is option.
45 INDEX A Auto Off Time r , 41 C Can cel ke y , 26 Con fig. Page , 37 Config uration Pa ge , 37 E error , 19 F Fun ctio n Pri or ity , 41 H Hex Dump , 35 J Job Control , 25 , 27 L List Print , 25 , 3.
46 UE USA B441 W Window s 2000 PCL 5e, uninstallin g , 15 PCL 6, uninst alling , 15 PostScript , uninstalling , 17 prin ter proper ties, P CL , 2 print er proper ties, Po stScrip t , 7 Window s 95/98/.
Note to users in the United States of America Notice: This equi pment has been tes ted and found to c omply with the li mits for a C lass B d igital de vice, purs u- ant to Part 15 of the FCC R ules. T hese lim its ar e desig ned to pro vide reas onabl e protecti on again st harmful in terferen ce in a resid ential installa tion.
PRINT ER Con troller Type 10 13 Operating Instruc tions Pr inter Refere nce 2 (option) UE USA B441-8627.
Ein wichtiger Punkt beim Kauf des Geräts Dixon Aficio 1515 (oder sogar vor seinem Kauf) ist das durchlesen seiner Bedienungsanleitung. Dies sollten wir wegen ein paar einfacher Gründe machen:
Wenn Sie Dixon Aficio 1515 noch nicht gekauft haben, ist jetzt ein guter Moment, um sich mit den grundliegenden Daten des Produkts bekannt zu machen. Schauen Sie zuerst die ersten Seiten der Anleitung durch, die Sie oben finden. Dort finden Sie die wichtigsten technischen Daten für Dixon Aficio 1515 - auf diese Weise prüfen Sie, ob das Gerät Ihren Wünschen entspricht. Wenn Sie tiefer in die Benutzeranleitung von Dixon Aficio 1515 reinschauen, lernen Sie alle zugänglichen Produktfunktionen kennen, sowie erhalten Informationen über die Nutzung. Die Informationen, die Sie über Dixon Aficio 1515 erhalten, werden Ihnen bestimmt bei der Kaufentscheidung helfen.
Wenn Sie aber schon Dixon Aficio 1515 besitzen, und noch keine Gelegenheit dazu hatten, die Bedienungsanleitung zu lesen, sollten Sie es aufgrund der oben beschriebenen Gründe machen. Sie erfahren dann, ob Sie die zugänglichen Funktionen richtig genutzt haben, aber auch, ob Sie keine Fehler begangen haben, die den Nutzungszeitraum von Dixon Aficio 1515 verkürzen könnten.
Jedoch ist die eine der wichtigsten Rollen, die eine Bedienungsanleitung für den Nutzer spielt, die Hilfe bei der Lösung von Problemen mit Dixon Aficio 1515. Sie finden dort fast immer Troubleshooting, also die am häufigsten auftauchenden Störungen und Mängel bei Dixon Aficio 1515 gemeinsam mit Hinweisen bezüglich der Arten ihrer Lösung. Sogar wenn es Ihnen nicht gelingen sollte das Problem alleine zu bewältigen, die Anleitung zeigt Ihnen die weitere Vorgehensweise – den Kontakt zur Kundenberatung oder dem naheliegenden Service.
